Introduction To Chapter 3-Wiring Methods and Materials

CHAPTER
INTRODUCTION TO CHAPTER 3—WIRING METHODS AND MATERIALS

Chapter 3 covers wiring methods and materiais, and provides some very specific instaliation requirements for conductors, cables,
boxes, raceways, and fittings. This chapter includes detailed information about the instaliation and restrictions involved with wiring
methods.
It may be because of that detail that many people incorrectly appiy the rules from this chapter. Be sure to pay careful attention to
the details, and be sure that you make your instaliation in compliance with the rules in the Code, not just in the manner that you
may have been taught or because "it's always been done that way." This is especially true when it comes to appiying the Tables.
Violations of the rules for wiring methods found in Chapter 3 can result in problems with power quality and can lead to fire, shock,
and other hazards.
The type of wiring method you'll use depends on several factors: Job specifications, Code requirements, the environment, need,
and cost are among them.
Chapter 3 begins with rules that are common to most wiring methods [Article 300], it then covers conductors [Article 310], and
enclosures [Articles 312 and 314]. The articles that follow become more specific and deal more in-depth with individua! wiring
methods such as specific types of cables [Articles 320 through 340] and varióos raceways [Articles 342 through 390]. The chapter
winds up with Article 392, a support system, and the final articles [Articles 394 through 398] for open wiring.
Notice as you read through the varióos wiring methods that the Code attempts to use similar subsection numbering for similar
topics from one article to the next, using the same digits after the decimal point in the section number for the same topic. This
makes it easier to lócate specific requirements in a particular article. For example, the rules for securing and supporting can be
found in the section that ends with .30 of each article. In addition to this, you'll find a "uses permitted" and "uses not permitted"
section in nearly every article.
Wiring Method ArUctes
• Article 300—Wiring Methods. Article 300 contains the general requirements for all wiring methods included in the
NEC, except for signaling and Communications systems, which are covered in Chapters 7 and 8.
• Article 310—Conductors for General Wiring. This article contains the general requirements for conductors, such as
insulation markings, ampacity ratings, and conductor use. Article 310 doesn't apply to conductors that are part of flex-
ible cords, fixture wires, or conductors that are an integral part of equipment [90.6 and 300.1 (B)].
• Article 312—Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and Meter Socket Enclosures. Article 312 covers the instaliation and con-
struction specifications for cabinets, cutout boxes, and meter socket enclosures.
• Article 314—Outlet, Device, Pulí and Junction Boxes, Conduit Bodies, Fittings, and Handhole Enclosures.
Instaliation requirements for outlet boxes, pulí and junction boxes, as well as conduit bodies, and handhole enclosures
are contained in this article.
Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 273

Chapter 3 Wiring Methods and Materials
Cable Articles • Article 33&—Service-Entrance Cable (Types SE and

USE), Service-entrance cable can be a single-conductor
Articles 320 through 340 address specific types of cables. !f you take
or a muíticonductor assembiy within an overall nonmetal-
the time to become familiar with the varióos types of cables, you'll:
lic covering. This cable is used primarily for services not
• Understand what's available for doing the work. over 600V, but is aiso permitted for feeders and branch
• Recognize cable types that have special NEC require- circuits.
ments.
• Article 340—Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuít
• Avoid buying cable that you can't install due to Code
Cable (Type UF). Underground feeder cable is a mois-
requirements you can't meet with that particular wiring
ture-, fungus-, and corrosion-resistant cable suitable for
method.
direct burial in the earth, and it comes in sizes 14 AWG
Here's a brief overview of each one: through 4/0 AWG [340.104]. Muíticonductor UF cable is
covered in molded plástic that surrounds the insulated
• Article 320—Armored Cable (Type AC). Armored cable
conductors.
is an assembiy of insulated conductors, 14 AWG through
1 AWG, individuaily wrapped with waxed paper. The
Raceway Articles
conductors are contained within a flexible spiral metal ,
(steel or aluminum) sheath that interlocks at the edges. ° Articles 342 through 390 address specific types of raceways. Refer
Armored cable looks like flexible metal conduit. Many to Article 100 for the definition of a raceway. If you take the time to
electricians cali this metal cable "BX®." become familiar with the varióos types of raceways, you'll:
• Article 330—Metal-Ciad Cable (Type MC). Metal-dad • Understand what's available for doing the work.
cable endoses insulated conductors in a metal sheath • Recognize raceway types that have special Code require-
of either corrugated or smooth copper or aluminum ments.
tubing, or spiral interlocked steel or aluminum. The phys- • Avoid buying a raceway that you can't install due to NEC
ical characteristics of Type MC cable make it a versatile requirements you can't meet with that particular wiring
wiring method permitted in almost any location and for method.
almost any application. The most commonly used Type
Here's a brief overview of each one:
MC cable is the interlocking kind, which looks similar to
armored cable or flexible metal conduit. • Article 342—Intermedíate Metal Conduit (Type IMC).
Intermedíate metal conduit is a circular metal raceway
• Article 334—Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable (Type NM).
with the same outside diameter as rigid metal conduit.
Nonmetallic-sheathed cable endoses two, three, or four
The wall thickness of intermedíate metal conduit is less
insulated conductors, 14 AWG through 2 AWG, within a
than that of rigid metal conduit, so it's a greater interior
nonmetallic outer jacket. Because this cable is nonme-
cross-sectional área for holding conductors. Intermedíate
tallic, it contains a sepárate equipment grounding con-
metal conduit is lighter and less expensive than rigid
ductor. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is a common wiring
metal conduit, but it's permitted in all the same locations
method used for residential and commercial branch cir-
as rigid metal conduit. Intermedíate metal conduit aiso
cuits. Many electricians cali this plastic-sheathed cable
uses a different steel alloy, which makes it stronger than
"Romex®."
rigid metal conduit, even though the walls are thinner.
• Article 336—Powíer and Control Tray Cable (Type TC).

• Article 344—Rigid Metal Conduit (Type RMC). Rigid
Power and control tray cable is a factory assembiy of two
metal conduit is similar to intermedíate metal conduit,
or more insulated conductors under a nonmetallic sheath
except the wall thickness is greater, so it's a smaller inte-
for instaliation in cable trays, in raceways, or supported
rior cross-sectional área. Rigid metal conduit is heavier
by a messenger wire.
than intermedíate metal conduit and it's permitted to be
installed in any location, just like intermedíate metal con-
duit.
274 Mike Holt's lllustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Wiring Methods and Materials Chapter 3
• Article 348—Flexible Metal Conduit (Type FMC). • Article 362—Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT).
Flexible meta! conduit is a raceway of circular cross Electrical nonmetallic tubing is a pliable, corrugated, cir-
section made of a heücally wound, interlocl<ed metal cular raceway made of PVC. It's often called "Smurf Pipe"
strip of either steel or aluminum. It's commonly called or "Smurf Tube," because it was available only in blue
"Greenfieid" or "Flex." when it carne out and at the time the children's cartoon
characters "The Smurfs," were popular. It's now available
• Article 350—Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (Type
in múltiple colors such as red and yellow as well as blue.
LFMC). Liquidtight flexible metal conduit is a raceway
of circular cross section with an outer liquidtight, non- • Article 376—Metal Wireways. A metal wireway is a
metallic, sunlight-resistant jacket over an inner flexible sheet metal trough with hinged or removable covers for
metal core, with associated couplings, connectors, and housing and protecting electrical conductors and cable, in
fittings. It's listed for the instaliation of electric conduc- which conductors are placed after the wireway has been
tors. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit is commonly called installed as a complete system.
"Sealtite®" or simply "liquidtight." Liquidtight flexible
• Article 380—Multioutlet Assemblies. A multiout-
metal conduit is of similar construction to flexible metal
let assembiy is a surface, flush, or freestanding raceway
conduit, but it has an outer thermoplastic covering.
designed to hold conductors and receptacles. It's assem-
• Article 352—Rigid Polyvinyl Chioride Conduit (Type bled in the fieId or at the factory.
PVC). Rigid polyvinyl chioride conduit is a nonmetallic
• Article 386—Surtace Metal Raceways. A surface metal
raceway of circular cross section with integral or associ-
raceway is a metallic raceway intended to be mounted
ated couplings, connectors, and fittings. It's listed for the
to the surface with associated accessories, in which con-
instaliation of electrical conductors,
ductors are placed after the raceway has been installed
• Article 356—Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit as a complete system.
(Type LFNC). Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit is
• Article 388—Surface Nonmetallic Raceways. A sur-
a raceway of circular cross section with an outer liquid-
face nonmetallic raceway is intended to be surface
tight, nonmetallic, sunlight-resistant jacket over an inner
mounted with associated accessories. Conductors are
flexible core, with associated couplings, connectors, and
placed inside after the raceway has been installed as a
fittings. It's listed for the instaliation of electrical conduc-
complete system.
tors. LFNC is available in three types:
- Type LFNC-A (orange). A smooth seamiess inner core
Cable lây
and cover bonded together with reinforcement layers
inserted between the core and covers. • Article 392—Cable Trays. A cable tray system is a unit
or assembiy of units or sections with associated fittings
- Type LFNC-B (gray). A smooth inner surface with inte-
that form a structural system used to secureiy fasten or
gral reinforcement within the conduit wall.
support cables and raceways. A cable tray isn't a race-
- Type LFNC-C (black). A corrugated interna! and exter-
way; it's a support system for raceways, cables, and
na! surface without integral reinforcement within the
enclosures.
conduit wall.
• Article 358—Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).

Electrical metallic tubing is a nonthreaded thinwall race-
way of circular cross section designed for the physi-
cal protection and routing of conductors and cables.
Compared to rigid metal conduit and intermedíate metal
conduit, electrical metallic tubing is relatively easy to
bend, cut, and ream. EMT isn't threaded, so all connec-
tors and couplings are of the threadless type. Today, It's
available in a range of colors, such as red and blue.
Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHoltcom • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 275

Notes
Mike HoiVs lllustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
ARTICLE
301
lIIiI Wiring Methods
INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 300—WIRING METHODS
Article 300 contains the general requirements for ail wiring methods included in the NEC. However, the article doesn't appty to
Communications systems, which are covered in Chapter 8, except when Article 300 is specifically referenced in Chapter 8.
This article is primarily concerned with how to install, route, spiice, protect, and secure conductors and raceways. How well you conform
to the requirements of Article 300 will generally be evident in the finished work, because many of the requirements tend to determine the
appearance of the instaliation.
Because of this, it's often easy to spot Article 300 problems if you're looking for Code violations. For example, you can easily see when
someone runs an equipment grounding conductor outside a raceway instead of grouping all conductors of a circuit together, as required by
300.3(B).
A good understanding of Article 300 will start you on the path to correctly installing the wiring methods included in Chapter 3. Be sure to
carefully consider the accompanying illustrations, and refer to the definitions in Article 100 as needed.
PART L GENERAL ^^^^^^^W integral Parts of Equipment
300.1 Scope.
(A) Wiring Installations. Article 300 contains the general require-

ments for power and lighting wiring methods.
Author's Comment: The requirements contained in Article 300

don't apply to the wiring methods for signaling and Communi-
cations systems, except where there is a specific reference in
Chapter 7 or 8 to a rule in Article 300.
• CATV, 820.3
• Class 2 and 3 Circuits, 725,3
I The r
• Communications Cables and Raceways, 800.133(A)t2)
• FireAlarm Circuits, 760.3 I applV
Figure 300-1
(B) Integral Parts of Equipment. The requirements contained in
Article 300 don't apply to the internal parts of electrical equipment.
Author's Comment: Industry practico is to describe raceways
Figure 300-1
using inch sizes, such as y2 in., 2 in., and so on; however, the
(C) Trade Sizes. Designators for raceway trade sizes are given in proper reference (2005 NEC change) is to use "Trade Size Vz''
Table 300.1 (C). or "Trade Size 2." In this textbook we use the term "Trade Size."

300.3 Wiring Methods
300.3 Conductors. Conductors G r o u p e d Together

300.3(B)(1)
(A) Conductors. Single conductors must be installed within a Chapter
3 wiring method, such as a raceway, cable, or enclosure.
Ex: Overhead conductors can be installed in accordance with 225.6.
(B) Circuit Conductors Grouped Togetlier. All conductors of a circuit í

must be installed in the same raceway, cable, trench, cord, or cable Conductors run in parallel must
tray, except as permitted by (1) through (4). Figure 300-2 have all circuit conductors within
the s a m e raceway, trench, or cable.
Circuit Conductors G r o u p e d Together

COftynghl 2011. www klik«Hon com
300.3(B) _
ve Figure 300-3
VIOLATION Induced Currents ín Ferrous Metal Parts

Hysteresis Heating
CopyngW 2011, « « . MiKeHoít eom
Ferrous Metal
(not a l u m i n u m ) /'•-,
All conductors of a circuit must be installed in t h e One Cycle - AC
same raceway, cable, trench, cord, or cable tray to
minimize induction heating of metallic raceways
and enclosures. and to maintain a low-impedance
ground-fault current path.
wwwMlwHoaconi
Figure 300-2
(1) Paralleled Installations. Conductors installed in parallel in accor-

Ferrous metal (steel a n d iron) molecules align to the
dance with 310.10(H) must have all circuit conductors within the polarity of the magnetic field, a n d w h e n t h e field reverses,
same raceway, cable tray, trench, or cable. Figure 300-3 the molecules reverse their polarity. This back-and-forth
alignment of the molecules heats up ferrous metal parts.
Ex: Parallel conductors run underground can be installed in differ-
Figure 300-4
ent raceways (Phase A in raceway 1, Phase B in raceway 2, and so
forth) if, in arder to reduce or elimínate inductive heating, if the race-
way is nonmetallic or nonmagnetic and the instaliation compiles with (3) Nonferrous Wiring Methods. Circuit conductors can be installed
300.20(8). See 300.5(1} Ex Z in different raceways (Phase A in raceway 1, Phase B in raceway 2,
and so on) if, in order to reduce or elimínate inductive heating, the
Author's Comment: All conductors of a circuit must be raceway is nonmetallic or nonmagnetic and the instaliation compiles
installed in the same raceway, cable, trench, cord, or cable tray with 300.20(8). See 300.3(B)(1) and 300.5(1) Ex 2.
to minimize induction of the heating of ferrous metal raceways
and enclosures, and to maintain a low-impedance ground-fault (C) Conductors of Different Systems.
current path [250,4(A)(3)]. Figure 300-4
(1) Mixing. Power conductors of alternating-current and direct-cur-
rent systems rated 600V or less can occupy the same raceway, cable,
(2) Grounding and Bonding Conductors. Equipment grounding
or enclosure if all conductors have an insulation voltage rating not
jumpers can be located outside of a flexible raceway if the bonding
less than the máximum circuit voltage. Figure 300-6
jumper is installed in accordance with 250.102(E)(2}. Figure 300-5
Wiring Methods
Equipment Bonding J u m p e r Mixing P o w e r a n d Control Conductors

Outside a Raceway
250.102(E) 12}
V I O L A T I O N [725.136(A)]
Control, signal, and Communications wiring
must be separated from power and lighting
W h e r e an external bonding j u m p e r circuits so the higher-voltage conductors
or conductor, or equipment bonding don't accidentally energize them.
j u m p e r is installed, it must be routed
with t h e raceway and can't e x c e e d
6 ñ i n length.
Figure 300-5 Figure 300-7
• Class circuit conductors can be installed with associated

Mixing Conductors of Different S y s t e m s power conductors [725.48(B)(1)] if all conductors have an
300.3(C)(1) insulation voltage rating not less than the máximum circuit
voltage [300.3(C)(1)1. Figure 300-8
4 8 0 V Circuit
6 0 0 V Insulation
Mixing Class 1 Conductors With

120V Circuit
Power Conductors - Associated Equipment
6 0 0 V Insulation
725.48(B)(1)
Associated E q u i p m e n t
Conductors of different systems can occupy the s a m e

raceway, cable, or enclosure if the insulation voltage
rating isn't less than t h e m á x i m u m circuit voltage.
Power Conductors
Class 1 Control Circuit
Figure 300-6
Class 1 control circuits a n d p o w e r
conductors associated with t h e s a m e
Author's Comments: e q u i p m e n t can o c c u p y the s a m e raceway.
• Control, signal, and Communications wiring must be Cociyn8hl2011,*ww.Mi«ieHoltcom
separated from power and lighting circuits so the higher-

voltage conductors don't accidentally energize the control, Figure 300-8
signal, or Communications wiring: Figure 300-7
- CATV Coaxial Cable, 820,133(A)

A Class 2 circuit that's been reclassified as a Ciass 1 circuit
- Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Control Circuits, 725.48 and [725.130{A) Ex 2] can be installed with associated power
725.136(A) conductors [725.48(B)(1)] ií all conductors have an insulation
- Communications Circuits, 800.133{A)(1)(c) voltage rating not less than the máximum circuit voltage
- FireAlarm Circuits, 760.136(A) [300.3{C)(1)]. Figure 300-9
- Instrumentation Tray Cable, 727.5
- Sound Circuits, 640.9(C)

300.4 Wiring IVIethods
Class 2 and 3 Circuits Reclassified as Class 1 (A) Cables and Raceways Through Wood Members. When the fol-
725.130(A) Ex 2
lowing wiring methods are installed through wood members, they
must comply with (1) and (2). Figure 300-11
• Armored Cable, Article 320

• Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing, Article 362
Where a Class 2 or 3 circuit is reclassified as a
Class 1 circuit, it can b e run in the s a m e raceway, • Flexible Metal Conduit, Article 348
cable, or enclosure with power conductors to • Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit, Article 350
functionally associated equipment [725.48(B)].
• Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit, Article 356
• Metal-Ciad Cable, Article 330
• Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable, Article 334
^^T:^ Class 2 Circuit
• Service-Entrance Cable, Article 338
Reclassified a s
a Class 1 Circuit • Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cable, Article 340
Figure 300-9 Protection Against Physical D a m a g e

R a c e w a y s a n d Cables T h r o u g h W o o d Members
300.4(A)
Note 2: PV system conductors, both direct current and alternating
current, are permitted to be installed in the same raceways. outlet
and junction boxes, or similar fittings with each other, but they must
Bored Hote, [300.4(A)(1)]
be kept entirely independent of all other non-PV system wiring
VÁ in.orMore
[690.4(6)1. Figure 300-10
No Steel Píate Required
Bored Hole, [300.4(A)(1

Less T h a n VÁ in.
Steel Píate Required
Notch (if Permitted)~j

[300.4(A)(2)] I
Steel Píate Required :
Armored Cable Metal-Ciad Cable

Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable
Flexible Metal Conduit Sen/ice-Entrance Cable
Liquidtight Flexible Conduit CopyngM 2011. www MAeHo* com
Figure 300-11
PV systeiTi conductors. both de and ac^ are perriiiUed_tg
be installed in the s a m e raceways. outlet and junction
^ boxes. or similar fittings. but must be entirely
independent of non-PV system wiring [690.4(8)].
(1) Holes In Wood Members. Hotes through wood framing members
for the above cables or raceways must be not less than VA in. from
Figure 300-10
the edge of the wood member. If the edge of the hole is less than VA
in. from the edge, a '/e in. thick steel píate of sufficient length and
300.4 Protection Against Physical Damage. Con- width must be installed to protect the wiring method from screws and
ductors, raceways, and cables must be protected against physical nails.
damage [110.27(6)].
Ex 1: A steel piafe isn't required to protect rigid metal conduit, inter-
medíate metal conduit, PVC conduit, or electrical metallic tubing.
280 Mike HolVs lllustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Wiring IVIethods 300.4
Ex 2: A listed and marked steel píate less than /w in. thick that pro- R a c e w a y s a n d Cables Through W o o d M e m b e r s
vides equal or better protection against nail or screw penetration is Notches in W o o d
300.4(A)(2) Ex 2
permitted. Figure 300-12
Raceways and Cables T h r o u g h W o o d M e m b e r s

Bored Holes
300.4(A)(1) Ex 2
A listed a n d marked steel

TT píate less than 1/16th i n .
^ 1 V thick can be used w h e r e
raceways a n d cables are
laid in w o o d notches.
A listed a n d marked steel

( píate less than 1/16th i n .
Figure 300-13
\ thick can be used w h e r e t h e
IV4 in. space from the nearest
1 \ edge can't be maintained.
(1) Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable (NM). If Type NM cables pass
through factory or field openings in metal framing members, the cable
must be protected by listed bushings or listed grommets that cover all
Figure 300-12
metal edges. The protection fitting must be secureiy fastened in the
opening before the instaliation of the cable. Figure 300-14
Author's Comment: Hardened steel piafes thinner than Vie in.

have been tested and found to provide better protection from
Protection Against Physical D a m a g e
screw and nail penetration than the thicker plates. Type N M Cable T h r o u g h Metal Framing M e m b e r s
300.4(B)(1)
(2) Notches in Wood Members. If notching of wood framing mem-
bers for cables and raceways are permitted by the building code, a
'/i6Ín. thick steel píate of sufficient length and width must be installed Metal
to protect the wiring method laid in these wood notches from screws Studs
and nails.
iys. CAUTION: ^hen drilling or notching wood members,

' • be sure to check with the building inspector to
ensure you don't damage or weaken the structure
and viólate the building code.
N M cable installed through metal f r a m i n g m e m b e r s
Ex 1: A steel píate isn't required to protect rigid metal conduit, inter- must be protected by listed bushings or g r o m m e t s .
medíate metal conduit, PVC conduit, or electrical metallic tubing.

Figure 300-14
Ex 2: A listed and marked steel píate less than /w in. thick that pro-
vides equal or better protection against nail or screw penetration is
(2) Type NM Cable and Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing. If nails or
screws are likely to penétrate Type NM cable or electrical nonmetallic
(B) Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable and Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing tubing, a steel sieeve, steel píate, or steel clip not less than '/e in. in
Through Metal Framing Members. thickness must be installed to protect the cable or tubing.
IVlike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHoltcom • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633)

Ex: A listed and marked steel píate less than A in. thick that pro- Protection Against Physical D a m a g e
Cables Parallel to Framing M e m b e r s and Furring Strips
300.4(D)
permitted.
Framing
" Member
(C) Behind Suspended Ceilings. Wiring metliods, such as cables or
raceways, installed behind paneis designed to allow access must be
Cable must be at Ieast I V i in. from the
supported in accordance with its applicable article. Figure 300-15
e d g e of a framing m e m b e r or furring
strip, or be protected by a steel píate.

Behind S u s p e n d e d Ceilings
300.4(C)
Furring Framing
Suspended Strip Member
Wiring installed behind paneis C o p y r i í * M11. «ww M Í I B U D U con.
Ceiling
designed to allow a c c e s s m u s t
be supported in a c c o r d a n c e Figure 300-16
with its applicable article.
Author's Comment: This rule doesn't apply to control, signal-

CopyogW 3011. nwww MikeHo* com ing, and Communications cables, but similar requirements are
contained in Chapters 6.7, and 8 as follows:
Figure 300-15 • CATV Coaxial Cable, 820.24

• Communications Cable, 800.24
• Control and Signaling Cable, 725.24
Author's Comment: This rule doesn't apply to control, signat,
• Optical Fiber Cable, 770.24
and Communications cables, but similar requirements are con-
• Fire Alarm Cable, 760.8
tained in Chapters 6, 7, and 8 as follows:
• Audio Cable, 640.6(B)
• CATV Coaxial Cable. 820.21 and 820.24
Ex 1: Protection isn't required for rigid metal conduit, intermedíate
• Communications Cable, 800.21
metal conduit, PVC conduit, or electrical metallic tubing.
• Control and Signaling Cable, 725.21 and 725.24
• Fire Alarm Cable, 760.7 and 760.8 Ex 2: For concealed work in finished buildings, or finished paneis for
• Optical Fiber Cable. 770.21 and 770.24 prefabricated buildings ifsuch supporting is impracticable, the cables
• Audio Cable, 640.6{B) can be fished between access points.
(D) Cables and Raceways Parallel to Framing Members and Ex 3: A Usted and marked steel píate less than /le ¡n. thick that pro-
Furring Strips. Cables or raceways run parallel to framing members vides equal or better protection against nail or screw penetration is
or furring strips must be protected if they're likely to be penetrated by permitted.
nails or screws, by installing the wiring method so it isn't less than (E) Wiring Under Roof Decking. Cables, raceways, and enclosures
VA in. from the nearest edge of the framing member or furring strip. under metal-corrugated sheet roof decking must not be located
If the edge of the framing member or furring strip is less than 1 '/4 in. within VÁ in. of the roof decking, measured from the lowest surface
away, a Vie in. thick steel píate of sufficient length and width must be of the roof decking to the top of the cable, raceway. or box. In addi-
installed to protect the wiring method from screws and nails. Figure tion, cables, raceways, and enclosures aren't permitted in concealed
300-16 locations of metal-corrugated sheet decking type roofíng.
282 Mike Holt's lllustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 Nationai Electrical Code, Volume 1
Note: Roof decking material will be installed or replaced after the

Author's Comments:
initial raceway or cabling which may be penetrated by the screws or
other mechanical devices designed to provide "hold down" strength • If IMC or RMC conduit enters an enclosure without a
of the waterproof membrane or roof insulating material.
connector, a bushing must be provided, regardiess of the
Ex: Spacing from roof decking doesn't apply to rigid metal conduit conductor size [342.46 and 344.46].
and intermedíate metal conduit • An insulated fitting isn't required for a grounding electrode.
Figure 300-18
(F) Cables and Raceways Installed in Grooves. Cables and race-
ways installed in a groove must be protected by a '/le in. thick steel
píate or sieeve, or by VA in. of free space.
R a c e w a y Terminations
Author's Comment: An example is Type NM cable installed in 300.4(G)
a groove cut into the Styrofoam-type insulation building block
structure and then covered with wallboard.
Ex 1: Protection isn't required if tfie cable is installed in rigid metal

conduit, intermedíate metal conduit, PVC conduit, or electrical metal-
lic tubing.
Ex 2: A listed and marked steel píate less than /le in. thick that pro-
permitted.
A bushing isn't required for a
(G) Insulating Fittings. If raceways contain insulated circuit conduc- grounding electrode c o n d u c t o r
tors 4 AWG and larger that enter an enclosure, the conductors must 1
be protected from abrasión during and after instaliation by a fitting Figure 300-18
identified to provide a smooth, rounded insulating surface, such as an
insulating bushing. Figure 300-17
Ex: Insulating bushings aren't required if a raceway terminates in a
threaded raceway entry that provides a smooth, rounded, or flared
Protection of Insulated Circuit Conductors Bushing surface for the conductors. An example would be a meter hub fitting
Identified Insulated Fittings Not
300.4(G) Required oraMeyer's hub-type fitting.
(H) Structural Joints. A listed expansion/deflection fitting or other

ANY means approved by the authority having jurisdiction must be used
Wire Size
I M C - 342.46 where a raceway crosses a structural joint intended for expansión,
4 AWG contraction or deflection. j
R M C - 344.46
and L A R G E R
6 AWG 300.5 Underground Installations.

and S M A L L E R
(A) Mínimum Burial Depths. When cables or raceways are installed
4 AWG
underground, they musí have a minimum "cover" in accordance with
and L A R G E R
EMT Table 300.5. Figure 300-19
6 AWG
and S M A L L E R
4 AWG
and L A R G E R P V C - 352.46
6 AWG E N T - 362.46
and SMALLER
Copyright 2011. uvww MikeHolt com
Figure 300-17
Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHoltcom • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633)

Underground Installations - M i n i m u m Cover Depths U n d e r g r o u n d Installations

Table 300.5 Signal a n d C o m m u n i c a t i o n s Cables
UF or U S E RMC PVC Reskiential
Cables or or IMC not Encased 15A&20AGFCI
Conductors in Concrete 120V Branch Ckts
Street
Driveway 24 in. 24 in. 24 in. I24in.
Parking Lot
Driveways
One - Two
Family
Solid Rock
¡ 1 8 ín: |l8ln. Jl8in. t 12 in.
o
cae
With not Less than
2in. of Concrete Raceway On>y I Raceway Onty I
All Other |6in. 18 in. X 12 in.

24 In. T h e cover requirements contained in 300.5
Applications
apply t o signaling and Communications wiring.
Copynflhl 2011. •wwJ**«Ho«.cofn
(B) Wet Locations. The interior of enclosures or raceways installed

Table 300.5 Minimum Cover Requirements in luches in an underground instaliation are considered to be a wet location.
Cables and insulated conductors installed in underground enclo-
Buried Metal Nonmetallic
Location sures or raceways must be listed for use in wet locations according to
Cables Raceway Raceway
310.10(C). Spiices within an underground enclosure must be listed as
Under Building 0 0 0
suitable for wet locations [110.14(6)]. Figure 300-21
Dweiling Unit 24/12' 6 18
IDweIling Unit Driveway 18/12' 6 18/12'
Under Roadway 24 24 24 U n d e r g r o u n d Installations
W e t Locations
Other Locations 24 6 18
300.5(B}
'Residential branch circuits rated 120Voriess with GFCI protection and
Cables a n d insulated conductors installed in
máximum overcurrent protection of 20A. Note: This is a summary of the NEC 's
u n d e r g r o u n d raceways a n d enclosures must
Table 300.5. See the table in the NEC for full details.
be listed a s suitable for w e t locations.
Note 1 to Table 300.5 defines "Cover" as the distance from the top of the
underground cable or raceway to the top suríace ot finished grade. Figure
300-05 02 N1
Spiices within a n u n d e r g r o u n d
enclosure must be a p p r o v e d
Author's Comment: The cover requirements contained in
for w e t locations.
300.5 don't apply to the following signaling, Communications,
and other power-limited wiring systems: Figure 300-20
CowrtBM2011
• CATV, 90.3
• Class 2 and 3 Circuits, 725.3
• Communications Cables and Raceways, 90.3
Figure 300-21
• Fire Alarm Circuits, 760,3
• Optical Fiber Cables and Raceways, 770.3
284 Mike HoiVs Iilustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Author's Comment: The definition of a "Wet Location" as con- Underground Installations

tained in Article 100, includes installations underground, in Protection of Direct Buried
Conductors and Cables
concrete slabs in direct contact with the earth, locations subject 300.5(D)(1)
to saturation with water, and unprotected locations exposed to
weather If raceways are installed in wet locations above grade,
Protection isn't required t o
the interior of these raceways is aiso considered to be a wet extend more than 18 in. below
Protection
location [300.9]. for a m i n i m u m grade and protection above
of8ft ground must extend to a height
above ground. not less than 8 ft. S e e
(C) Cables Under Buildings. Cables installed under a building must
Table 300.5, C o l u m n s 1 and 4 .
be installed in a raceway that extends past the outside walls of the
CopyngN 2011. w*wJ*l(»Holi c ^ . -
building.
Ex 2: Type MC Cable Usted for direct burial is permitted under a build- V: 18 in. Cover'...I
y : ' 18 in. Cover
ing without instaliation in a raceway [330.10(A)(5)]. Figure 300-22
Figure 300-23
Type r^C Cable Under Buildings

300.5(C)Ex2 (4) Enclosure or Raceway Damage. If direct-buried cables, enclo-
sures, or raceways are subject to physical damage, the conductors
must be installed in rigid metal conduit, intermedíate metal conduit,
\ or Schedule 80 PVC conduit.

1
1 (E) Underground Spiices and Taps. Direct-buried conductors or
j 1 cables can be spiiced or tapped underground without a spiice box
^ ^ ^ ^
[300.15(G)], if the spiice ortap is made in accordance with 110.14(6).
Figure 300-24
Type ÍVIC cable listed for direct burial or concrete

encasement is permitted under a building without
instaliation in a raceway [330.10(A)f5)] a n d in w e t
U n d e r g r o u n d Spiices - Single Conductors
locations [330.10(AH11)].
300.5(E)
Figure 300-22
^ | y ^ Type U F o r U S E
^ ^ ^ ^ • ^ ^ Single C o n d u c t o r
(D) Protecting Underground Cables and Conductors. Direct-buried
conductors and cables such as Types MC, UF, and USE must be pro-
tected from damage in accordance with (1) through (4).
(1) Emerging from Grade. Direct-buried cables or conductors that

emerge from grade must be installed in an enclosure or raceway to
protect against physical damage. Protection isn't required to extend
more than 18 in. below grade, and protection above ground must Single Type U F or U S E conductors can be spiiced
u n d e r g r o u n d with a device that's listed for direct burial.
extend to a height of not less than 8 ft. Rgure 300-23
(2) Conductors Entering Buildings. Conductors that enter a building Figure 300-24
must be protected to the point of entrance.
Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633)

(F) Backfill. Backfill material for underground wiring must not U n d e r g r o u n d Installations
Grouping of Conductors
damage the underground cable or raceway, or contribute to the corro- 300.5(1)
sión of the metal raceway.
Author's Comment: Large rocks, chunks of concrete, steel

rods, mesh, and other sharp-edged objects must not be used OKAY
for backfill material, because they can damage the underground
conductors, cables, or raceways.
(G) Raceway Seals. If moisture could enter a raceway and contact

energized live parts, a seal must be installed at one or both ends of Vp opQ'
the raceway.
f All conductors of the s a m e circuit, inciuding the equipment
. grounding conductor, must be inside the same raceway or .
Author's Comment: This is a common probiem for equipment . in cióse proximity to each other. See 300.3(B).
located downhill from the supply, or in underground equipment
rooms. See 230.8 for service raceway seals and 300.7(A) for Figure 300-25
different temperature área seals.
Ex 2: Parallel circuit conductors installed in accordance with

Note: Hazardous explosive gases or vapors make It necessary to
seal underground raceways that enter the building in accordance 310.10(H) of the same phase or neutral can be installed in under-
with 501.15. ground PVC conduits, if inductive heating at raceway terminations is
reduced by the use of aluminum locknuts and cutting a slot between
Author's Comment: It isn't the intent of this Note to imply that the individual holes through which the conductors pass as required óy
sealing fittings of the types required in hazardous locations be 300.20(8). Figure 300-26
installed in unclassified locations, except as required in Chapter
5. This aiso doesn't imply that the sealing material provides a
watertight seal, but only that it prevenís moisture from entering
Underground Installations
the raceways.
Isolated Parallel Phases
300.5(1) Ex 2
(H) Bushing. Raceways that termínate underground must have
Individual sets of paraliei circuit
a bushing or fitting at the end of the raceway to protect emerging
conductors can be installed in
cables or conductors. individual raceways if inductive
heating can be reduced by
(I) Conductors Grouped Together. All conductors of the same cir- compiying with 300.20{B).
cuit, inciuding the equipment grounding conductor, must be inside
the same raceway, or in cióse proximity to each other. See 300.3(B). A l u m i n u m Locknuts
Figure 300-25 Nonmetallic R a c e w a y or

Cable with Nonmetallic Cover
Ex 1: Conductors can be installed in parallel in raceways, muíticon-
ductor cables, or direct-buried single-conductor cables. Each raceway
or muíticonductor cable must contain all conductors of the same cir-
cuit inciuding the equipment grounding conductor Each direct-bur-
ied single-conductor cable must be located in cióse proximity in the Figure 300-26
trench to the other single conductor cables in the same parallel set of
conductors, inciuding equipment grounding conductors.
Author's Comment: Installing ungrounded and neutral conduc-
tors in different PVC conduits makes it easier to termínate larger
parallel sets of conductors, but it will result in higher levéis oí
electromagnetic fields (EMF).
Mike HoiVs iiiustrated Guide to Understanding tlie 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Wiring Methods 300.6
(J) Earth Movement. Direct-buried conductors, cables, or raceways Protection Against Corrosión and Deterioration
300.6
that are subject to movement by settiement or frost musí be arranged
to prevent damage to conductors or equipment connected to the
wiring.
(K) DJrectJonal Bering. Cables or raceways installed using directional

boring equipment must be approved by the authority having jurisdic-
tion for this purpose.
Author's Comment: Directional boring technology uses a

directional drill, which is steered continuously from point "A" to
point "B." When the drill head comes out of the earth at point
"B," it's replaced with a back-reamer and the duct or raceway Raceways, cable armor, boxes, elbows, fittings,
being installed is attached to it. The size of the boring rig (hp, and supports must be of materiais suitable for
the environment in which they're to be installed.
torque, and pull-back power) comes into play, along with the
types of soil, in determining the type of raceways required. For Figure 300-27
telecommunications work, múltiple poly innerducts are pulled in
at one time. At major crossings, such as expressways, railroads,
or rivers, outerduct may be installed to créate a permanent (2) Organic Coatings on Boxes or Cabinets. Boxes or cabinets
sieeve for the innerducts. having a system of organic coatings marked "Raintight," "Rainproof,"
"Innerduct" and "outerduct" are terms usually associated or "OutdoorType," can be installed outdoors.
with optical fiber cable installations. while "unitduct" comes with
(3) In Concrete or in Direct Contact with the Earth. Ferrous metal
factory installed conductors. All of these come in various sizes.
raceways, cable armor, boxes, cable sheathing, cabinets, elbows,
Galvanized hgid metal conduit, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80
couplings, nipples, fittings, supports, and support hardware can be
PVC, HDPE conduit and nonmetallic underground conduit with
installed in concrete or in direct contact with the earth, or in áreas
conductors (NUCC) are common wiring methods used with
subject to severe corrosive influences if made of material approved
directional boring installations.
for the condition, or if provided with corrosión protection approved for
the condition.
300.6 Protection Against Corrosión and Deteriora-
tion. Raceways, cable trays, cablebus, cable armor, boxes. cable Author's Comment Galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing can
sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings, fittings, supports, and support be installed in concrete at grade level and in direct contact with the
hardware must be suitable for the environment. Figure 300-27 earth, but supplementary corrosión protection is usually required
(UL White Book, Guide Information for Electrical Equipment, vmN.
(A) Ferrous Metal Equipment. Ferrous metal raceways, enclosures,
ul.com/regulators/2008_WhiteBook.pdf). Electrical metallic tubing
cables, cable trays, fittings, and support hardware must be protected
can be installed in concrete above the ground floor slab generally
against corrosión by a coating of listed corrosion-resistant material.
without supplementary corrosión protection. Figure 300-28
Where conduit is threaded in the field, the threads must be coaíed
with an approved eiectrically conductive, corrosion-resistant com- (B) Aluminum Equipment. Aluminum raceways, cable trays, cable-
pound, such as coId zinc. bus, cable armor, boxes, cable sheathing, cabinets, elbows, cou-
plings, nipples, fittings, supports, and support hardware embedded or
Author's Comment: Nonferrous metal raceways, such as alu-
encased in concrete or in direct contact with the earth must be pro-
minum rigid metal conduit, don't have to meet the provisions of
vided with supplementary corrosión protection.
this section.
(1) Protected from Corrosión Solely by Enamel. If ferrous metal

parts are protected from corrosión solely by enamel, they must not be
used outdoors or in wet locations as described in 300.6(D).

Protection Against Corrosión (1) Exposed to Sunlight. If exposed to sunlight, the materiais must
Raceways in Concrete or Direct Contact with Earth
r 300.6(A)(3) ^ be listed or identified as sunlight resistant.
(2) Chemical Exposure. If subject to exposure to Chemical solvents,

vapors, spiashing, or immersion, materiais or coatings must either be
inherently resistant to Chemicals based upon their listing, or be identi-
fied for the specific chemical.
Galvanized EMT installed in concrete above a ground floor
slab doesn't require supplemental corrosión protection. j
(D) Indoor Wet Locations. In portions of dairy processing facilities,
laundries, canneries, and other indoor wet locations, and in locations
Galvanized R M C and IMC are
permitted in most locations without where walls are frequently washed or where there are surfaces of
supplemental conrosion protection. absorbent materiais, such as damp paper or wood, the entire wihng
na system, where installed exposed, inciuding all boxes, fittings, race-
I ways, and cables, must be mounted so there's at Ieast Va in. of air-

space between it and the wall or supporting surface.
Galvanized E M T in a ground floor slab or Author's Comment: See the definitions of "Exposed" and
in direct contact with the earth requires "Location, Wet" in Article 100.
supplemental corrosión protection.
Ex: Nonmetallic raceways, boxes, and fittings are permitted without

ñgure 300-28
the airspace on a concrete, masonry tile, or similar surface.
(C) Nonmetallic Equipment. Nonmetallic raceways, cable trays, Note: Areas where acids and alkali Chemicals are handied and
stored may present corrosive conditions, particularty when wet or
cablebus, boxes, cables with a nonmetallic outer jacket and internal
damp. Severe corrosive conditions may aiso be present in portions
metal armor or jacket, cable sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings, of meatpacking plants, tanneries, glue houses, and some stables; in
nipples, fittings, supports, and support hardware must be made of installations immediately adjacent to a seashore or swimming pool,
spa, hot tub, and fountain áreas; in áreas where chemical deicers
material identified for the condition, and must comply with (1) and (2).
are used; and in storage celfars or rooms for hides, casings, fertilizer,
Figure 300-29 sait, and bulk Chemicals.
Protection Against Corrosión - Nonmetallic E q u i p m e n t 300,7 Raceways Exposed to Different Temperaturas.

300.6(C)
(A) Sealing. If a raceway is subjected to different temperatures, and
Where exposed t o sunlight, material must be listed
where condensation is known to be a probiem, the raceway must be
or identified as sunlight resistant [300.6(C)(1)].
filled with a material approved by the authority having jurisdiction that
will prevent the circulation of warm air to a colder section of the race-
way An explosionproof seal isn't required for this purpose. Figure
300-30
(B) Expansión Fittings. Raceways must be provided with expansión

fittings where necessary to compénsate for thermai expansión and
contraction. Figure 300-31
Nonmetallic raceways, enclosures, cable jackets,

fittings, supports, and other nonmetallic e q u i p m e n t
must be made of material a p p r o v e d for the
condition in which they're installed.
Figure 300-29
Mike Holt's lllustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Raceways Exposed to Not Pennitted in Raceways

Different Temperatures 300.Q
300.7(A}
Putty or Duct-Seal Walk-In 1

>
Freezer
in Raceway
or Cooler
Electric
Seal-Off Fitting Conductors
Violation
Not Required or Cables
Copyngnt 2011. vnmv.MikeHiTl) com
R a c e w a y s aren't permitted t o contain pipes

Raceways must be sealed t o prevent the circulation o f or tubes for s t e a m , water, air, g a s , drainage, etc.
warm air to a colder section of the raceway or sieeve.
Expansión Fitting Not Permitted in R a c e w a y s

300.7(B) Section 300.8
Expansión
Fitting
Okay
O p e n i n g is not a r a c e w a y
CcpyrighlZOlO
¥fwwMikeHollcom Water
R a c e w a y s are for the exclusive use of electrical

conductors a n d cables, a n d must not contain
piping for s t e a m , water, air, g a s , drainage, etc.
Figure 300-31
Figure 300-33
Note: Table 352.44 provides ttie expansión characteristics for PVC

conduit. The expansión characteristics for metal raceways are deter- 300.9 Raceways in Wet Locations Above Grade, insu-
mined by multipiying the valúes from Table 352.44 by 0.20, and the lated conductors and cables installed in raceways in aboveground
expansión characteristics for aluminum raceways are determined
wet locations must be listed for use in wet locations according to
by multipiying the valúes from Table 352.44 by 0.40. Table 354.44
provides the expansión characteristics for reinforced thermosetting 310.10{C). Figure 300-34
resin conduit (RTRC).
300.10 Electrical Continuity. Metal raceways, cables, boxes,
300.8 Not Permitted in Raceways. Raceways are designed fittings, cabinets, and enclosures for conductors must be metallically
for the exclusive use of electrical conductors and cables, and aren't joined together to form a continuous, low-impedance fault current
permitted to contain nonelectrical components, such as pipes or tubes path capabie of carrying any fault current likely to be imposed on it
for steam, water, air, gas, drainage, and so forth. Figures 300-32 and [110.10, 250.4(A)(3), and 250.122]. Figure 300-35
300-33

Raceways in W e t Locations A b o v e G r a d e Electrical Continuity - Short Sections of R a c e w a y s

300.9 300.10 Ex 1
VIOLATION
N M cable isn't
suitable for a
wet location
[334.12(B)(4)]. Short sections of r a c e w a y s used for support
or protection of cables aren't required to be
Insulated conductors and cables installed in eiectrically continuous or c o n n e c t e d t o an
raceways located in w e t locations must be e q u i p m e n t g r o u n d i n g conductor [250.86 Ex 2]
listed for use in w e t locations.
Copyright 2011. www MikeHoll com
Figure 300-34 Copyright 2011. www MMHoH coin
Figure 300-36
Electrical Continuity
300.10
300.11 Securing and Supporting.
Panel
Outlet (A) Secured in Place. Raceways, cable assemblies, boxes, cabinets,
and fittings must be secureiy fastened in place. The ceiling-support
wires or ceiling grid must not be used to support raceways and cables
(power, signaling, or Communications). However, independent support
wires that are secured at both ends and provide secure support are
Effective Ground-Fault Ground
Current Path Fault
All metal raceways, cables, enclosures, and fittings for

conductors must be bonded together to form an effective Securing a n d Supporting
ground-fault current path which is intended to facilítate the Fire-Rated S u s p e n d e d Ceiling
operation of the circuit overcurrent device. 300.11 (A)
Ceiling support wires can't be used t o support power,
Figure 300-35 signaling, or Communications raceways or cables.
Metal raceways and cable assemblies must be mechanically secured

to boxes, fittings, cabinets, and other enclosures.
Ex 1: Short lengths of metal raceways used for the support or pro-

tection of cables aren't required to be eiectrically continuous, ñor are
they required to be connected to an equipment grounding conductor
ofa type recognized in 250.118 [250.86 Ex 2 and 300.12 Ex]. Figure Independent support wires secured at both
300-36 e n d s that provide secure support are permitted.
Copyrtghl 2011. W)ni.MÉ*Hot«ani
Figure 300-37
Mike HolVs lllustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Author's Comment: Outlet boxes [314.23(D)] and luminaires Raceways Used for Support
can be secured to the suspended-ceiling grid if secureiy fas- 300.11 (B)
tened to the ceiling-framing members by mechanical means
such as bolts, screws, or rivets, or by the use of clips or other
^ L_
securing means identified for use with the type of ceiling-fram-
ing member{s) used [410.36(B)].
(1) Fire-Rated Ceiling Assembiy. Electrical wiring within the cavity

of a fire-rated floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling assembiy can be sup- VIOLATION
R a c e w a y s can't be used for
ported by independent support wires attached to the ceiling assem-
the support of other raceways,
biy. The independent support wires must be distinguishable from the cables, o r equipment.
suspended-ceiling support wires by color, tagging, or other effective
means.
www MWeHoH m m
(2) Nonfíre-Rated Ceiling Assembiy. Wiring in a nonfire-rated floor- •. • » » 'y.-*: '
ceiling or roof-ceiling assembiy can be supported by independent Figure 300-39

support wires attached to the ceiling assembiy. The independent sup-
port wires must be distinguishable from the suspended-ceiling sup-
(2) Class 2 and 3 Circuits. Class 2 and 3 cable can be supported by
port wires by color, tagging. or other effective means. Figure 300-38
the raceway that supplies power to the equipment controlled by the
Class 2 or 3 circuit Figure 300-40
Securing and Supporting

^ Nonfire-Rated S u s p e n d e d Ceiling
300.11 (A){2) R a c e w a y s U s e d for Support
Ceiling support wires can't be used t o support power, Class 2 a n d 3 C a b l e s
— signaling, or Communications raceways or cables. 300.11(B)(2)
Equipment controlled
by a Class 2 circuit.
Cable supported by a
Independent support wires used for support can b e ] raceway is permitted.
attached to the nonfire-rated assembiy. These support
wires must be distinguishable by color, tagging. etc.
Copyright » 1 1 . www.MiksHott.i Class 2 cables can be supported by the raceway that
supplies power to the equipment controlled by the cable.
Figure 300-38
Figure 300-40
(B) Raceways Used for Support. Raceways must not be used as a

(3) Boxes Supported by Raceways. Raceways are permitted as a
means of support for other raceways, cables, or nonelectrical equip-
means of support for threaded boxes and conduit bodies in accor-
ment, except as permitted in (1) through (3). Figure 300-39
dance with 314.23(E) and (F), or to support luminaires in accordance
(1) Identified. If the raceway or means of support is identified for the with410.36(E).
purpose.
(C) Cables Not Used as Means of Support. Cables must not be used
to support other cables, raceways, or nonelectrical equipment. Figure
300-41

Mechanical Continuity
300.12 Ex 1
Cables Not Used a s

M e a n s of Support
300.11 (C)
Violation Furnace
Cables can't be used to support

ottier cables, raceways, or
nonelectrical equipment.
CopyngWZOII. MHt.MIlHHakMm
Figure 300-41
300.12 Mechanical Continuity. Raceways and cable Short sections of raceways used t o provide support
or protection of cable from physical d a m a g e aren't
sheaths must be mechanically continuous between boxes, cabinets, required to be mechanically continuous.
and fittings. Figure 300-42
Figure 300-43
300.12
O p e n - B o t t o m Equipment
300.12 Ex 2
R a c e w a y s a n d cable sheaths must

be mechanically continuous b e t w e e n
enclosures and fittings.
B 1 .
OKAY —
i
R a c e w a y s and cables installed into the bottom of open-

bottom equipment aren't required to be mechanically
Figure 300-42 secured to the equipment.
Figure 300-44
Ex 1: Short sections of raceways used to provide support or protec-

tion of cable from physical damage aren't required to be mechanically Author's Comment: When raceways are stubbed into an open-
continuous [250.86 Ex 2 and 300.10 Ex 1]. Figure 300-43 bottom switchboard, the raceway, inciuding the end fitting, can't
rise more than 3 in. above the bottom of the switchboard enclo-
Ex 2: Raceways at the bottom of open-bottom equipment, such sure [408.5].
as switchboards, motor control centers, and transformers, aren't
required to be mechanically secured to the equipment. Figure 300-44
Mike Hoit's Iliustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National ElecMcal Code, Volume 1
300.13 Spiices and PIgtalls. Author's Comment: Tfie opening of tlie ungrounded con-
ductors, or tlie neutral conductor of a 2-wire circuit during the
A) Conductor Spiices. Spiices must be in enclosures as per 300.15
repiacement of a device, doesn't cause a safety hazard, so pig-
and aren't permitted in raceways, except as permitted by 376.56, taillng these conductors isn't required [110.14(B)].
386.56, or 388.56. Figure 300-45
CAUTION: If the continuity of the neutral conductor
of a multiwire circuit is interrupted (oponed), the
resultant over- or undervoltage can cause a fire and/
Spiices in R a c e w a y
or destruction of electrical equipment
300.13(A)
Example: A 3-wire, single-phase, 120/240V multiwire circuit

supplies a 1,200W, 120V hair dryer and a 600W, 120V televi-
sión. Figure 300-47
If the neutral conductor of the multiwire circuit is interrupted, it

will cause the 120V televisión to opérate at WOVand consume
1,067W of power (instead of 600W) for only a fewseconds
before itburns up. Figure 300-48
Spiices or taps aren't
permitted within a raceway. Step 1: Determine the resistance ofeach appliance, R = EVP.
CopyogM 2011, www.Mik8HoK.eom

Rof the hair dryer = 120V2/1,200W
R of the hair dryer = 12 ohms
Figure 300-45
R ofthe televisión = 120V2/600W
R of the televisión = 24 ohms
Step 2: Determine the current of the circuit, I = E/R.

(B) Conductor Continuity. Continuity of the neutral conductor of a
multiwire branch circuit must not be interrupted by the removal of a E=240V
wiring device. In these applications the neutral conductors must be R = 36 ohms (12 ohms + 24 ohms)
spiiced together, and a pigtail must be provided for the wiring device. l = 240V/36ohms
Figure 300-46 l^6.70A
Step 3: Determine the operating voltage for each appliance, E =

IxR.
Conductor Continuity (Pigtail)
Multiwire Circuit I = 6.70A
300.13(B) R=12 ohms for hair dryer and 24 ohms for TV
Voltage of hair dryer ^ 6.70A x 12 ohms

Voltage of hair dryer = 80V
Multiwire Circuit. Voltage of televisión - 6.70A x 24 ohms

Conductor Pigtail
Pigtail Required not Required Voltage of televisión = 160V
for Neutral
Continuity of the neutral conductor of a multiwire

branch circuit must not be interrupted by the removal
of a wiring device.
Figure 300-46
IVlike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.IVIikeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 293

Danger of an O p e n Neutral Miswired Multiwire Circuit - Overload on Neutral

on a Multiwire Circuit
V I O L A T I O N [210.4(B)] , ^ ^
Okay 20A + 15A = 35A / \n = 3 5 A
L1
L1 " T " 600W
i L2 TV 120V TV
24Q: 240V
H.D. T2&1 , V2
12Í1 120V 1200W
Vi ! I Hair Dryer
L2-*- _ j — — »
Copynghl 2011, *w*.Mit<eHo« rom
Parallel Circuit
er Connection Caution: If the u n g r o u n d e d conductors o f a multiwire
Voltage Drop of circuit aren't terminated to different phases or lines,
Televisión = 120V the currents on the neutral conductor won't cancel,
Voltage Drop of but will a d d , which can c a u s e a d a n g e r o u s overload
Hair Dryer = 1 2 0 V on the neutral conductor.
300.14 Length of Free Conductors. At ieast 6 in of free

Danger of an O p e n Neutral
on a Multiwire Circuit conductor, measured trom the point in the box where the conductors
enter the enclosure, must be left at each outlet, junction, and switch
Danger point for spiices or terminations of luminaires or devices. Figure
300-50
L e n g t h of Free Conductor
300.14
240V Series Circuit A m i n i m u m of 3 in.

Series Circuit outside o f o p e n i n g is required.
Voltage Drop of
Open Neutral Televisión = 160V
Voltage Drop o f
Hair Dryer = 8 0 V
Copyngni 20)1. www.UkvHolLcom
Figure 300-48
WARNING: Failure to terminate the ungrounded con-

ductors to sepárate phases can cause the neutral Boxes with o p e n i n g s less than 8 in. must have at Ieast
6 in. of free conductor a n d at Ieast 3 in. of free conductor
conductor to become overloaded, and the insulation
outside the box o p e n i n g .
can be damaged or destroyed by excessive heat Conductor
overheating is known to decrease the service Ufe of insulating Figure 300-50
materiais, which creates the potential for arcing faults in
hidden locations, and can ultimately lead to fires. It isn't
known just how long conductor insulation lasts, but heat does Boxes that have openings less than 8 in. in any dimensión, must have
decrease its Ufe span. Figure 300-49 at ieast 6 in. of free conductor, measured from the point where ttie
conductors enter the box, and at Ieast 3 in. of free conductor outside
the box opening. Figure 300-51
294 Mike HoiVs iliustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Length of Free Conductor Spiice and Termination Points

300.14 300.15
3 in. outside of A box must b e installed at each spiice or
opening is required. termination point for power a n d lighting systems.
At Ieast 6 in. of free conductor is required at each box.

Where the box opening is less than 8 in., conductors
must extend at Ieast 3 in. outside the box o p e n i n g .
Author's Comment: Tiie following text was tiie Paneis'

Statement when it rejected my proposal to require the free con- Spiice a n d Termination Points
Conduit Body
ductor length to be unspiiced in the 2008 NEC. "The purpose
of Section 300.14 is to permit access to the end of the con-
ductor. Whether this conductor is spiiced or unspiiced does
not affect the length of this free end of the conductor. Many
conductors origínate inside the box and are spiiced to other con-
ductors within the box but extend out of the box for connection
to a device of some kind. Making this change would not permit
this very common application. Even the exception to this section
States that unspiiced or unterminated conductors do not have to
comply with 300.14." Conductors can b e Spiices aren't permitted
spiiced in a conduit in a short-radius conduit
body [314.16(C)(2)]. body [314.16(C)(2)].
Ex: Six inches of free conductor isn't required for conductors that
pass tfirougfi a box wittiout a spiice or termination. C o p r i a M 2011. *ww.M*«Holl,coni
Figure 300-53
300.15 Boxes or Conduit Bodies. A box must be installed
at each spiice or termination point, except as permitted for: Figure
300-52 Author's Comment: Boxes aren't required for the following sig-
naling and Communications cables or raceways: Figure 300-54
• Cabinet or Cutout Boxes, 312.8
• Conduit Bodies, 314.16(C) Figure 300-53 • • CATV. 90.3 ' ^
• Luminaires, 410.64 • Class 2 and 3 Control and Signaling, 725.3

• Communications, 90.3 . '
• Surface Raceways, 386.56 and 388.56
• Optical Fiber, 770.3
• Wireways, 376.56
mke Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 295

Spiice and Termination Points (C) Raceways for Support or Protection. When a raceway is used
Control, Signal, a n d Communications Circuits
for the support or protection of cables, a fitting to reduce the potential
for abrasión must be placed at the location the cables enter the race-
way. Figure 300-56
Reception A r e a
R a c e w a y s for Support or Protection
I A bbox
( isn't
30Q.15{C)
required.
\r R o o m
Copyrighl 2011. wwwMilmHoll.com W h e n a raceway is used for the support or

protection of cables, a fitting to reduce the
A box isn't required for Communications, signal, potential for abrasión must b e placed at
and control conductors [90.3, 725.3, and 770.3]. the location the cables enter the raceway.
Figure 300-54
Fittings and Connectors. Fittings can only be used with the specific
wiring methods for which they're listed and designed. For example,
Type NM cable connectors must not be used with Type AC cable, and
electrical metallic tubing fittings must not be used with rigid metal
conduit or intermedíate metal conduit, unless listed for the purpose. Figure 300-56
Figure 300-55
(F) Fitting. A fitting is permitted in lieu of a box or conduit body where

conductors aren't spiiced or terminated within the fitting if it's acces-
Fittings and Connectors sible after instaliation. Figure 300-57

300.15
Fitting in Lieu o f Box

300.15{F)
272 E M T
Connector VIOLATION
Fittings are permitted only
\
on the wiring method f o r
which they're listed. A fitting is permitted in lieu of a box or
conduit body w h e r e the conductors aren't
TA R M C spiiced or terminated within the fitting and
Copynghl 2011. www.UiksHoiI com
the fitting is accessible after instaliation.
Figure 300-55
Copyr>Qh12011 www M Í K B H O I I com
Author's Comment: PVC conduit couplings and connectors are

Figure 300-57
permitted with eléctrica! nonmetallic tubing if the proper glue is
used in accordance with manufacturer's instructions [110.3(B)].
See 362.48.
(G) Underground Spiices. A box or conduit body isn't required where Spiice and Termination Points
Handhole Enclosure
a spiice is made underground if the conductors are spiiced with a
300.15(L)
spiicing device listed for direct burial. See 110.14(B) and 300.5(E).
A box isn't required for conductors in handhole

Author's Comment: See the definition of "Conduit Body" in enclosures. Spiices must comply with 314.30.
Article 100.
ÉÉHlhhHíliWÉlWlÉf
{!) Enclosures. A box or conduit body isn't required where a spiice
is made in a cabinet or in cutout boxes containing switches or over-
current devices if the spiices or taps don't fill the wiring space at any
crass section to more than 75 percent, and the wiring at any cross
section doesn't exceed 40 percent. See 312.8 and 404.3(B). Figure
300-58
Figure 300-59
Spiice and Termination Points
Switch/Circuit Breaker Enclosure
300.15(1) 300.16 Raceway or Cable to Open or Concealed
Wiring.
(B) Bushing. A bushing is permitted in lieu of a box or terminal where

An enclosure can be used as a the conductors emerge from a raceway and enter or terminate at
raceway if the conductor fill doesn't equipment such as open switchboards, unenclosed control equip-
exceed 4 0 % , a n d spiices are
ment, or similar equipment.
permitted if the fill doesn't exceed
7 5 % [312.8 a n d 404.3].
300.17 Raceway Sizing. Raceways must be large enough to
permit the instaliation and removal of conductors without damaging
the conductor's insulation.
Copynght 2011. *iww.M*oHcm com
Author's Comments:
Figure 300-58 • When all conductors in a raceway are the same size and of
the same insulation type, the number of conductors permitted
can be determined byAnnex C.
Author's Comment: See the definitions of "Cabinet" and
"Cutout Box" in Article 100. • When different size conductors are installed in a race-
way, conductor fill is limited to the percentages in Table 1 of
(L) Handhole Enclosures. A box or conduit body isn't required for Chapter 9. Figure 300-60
conductors installed in a handhole enclosure. Spiices must be made

in accordance with 314.30. Figure 300-59 Table 1, Chapters
Author's Comment: Spiices or terminations within a handhole Number Percent Fill
must be accomplished by the use of fittings listed as suitable for 1 Conductor 53%
wet locations [110.14{B) and 314.30(C)]. 2 Conductors 31%
3 or more 40%
The above percentages are based on conditions where the length of

the conductor and number of raceway bends are within reasonable
limits [Chapter 9, Table 1, Note 1].
Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.Mil(eHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 297

Raceway Fill LImitation C o n d u c t o r Cross-Sectional A r e a

Chapter 9, Table 1 Chapter 9, Tables 5 and 8
One Conductor
Raceway
5 3 % Fill
24 i n . o r Less:
6 0 % Fill
Note 4
Two Conductors
3 1 % Fill
Cable is Treated
OQD) a s 1 Conductor Table 5 Table 8 Table 8
Three o r More 5 3 % Fill, Note 9 10THHN 10 A W G 10 A W G
Conductors (Solid/Stranded) Bare Stranded
Bare Solid
4 0 % Fill Cop/nght 2011. www WikeHoA com
Area Area Area
W h e n conductors are installed in a raceway, 0.0211 in.2 0.008 in.2 0.011 in.2
conductor fill is limited to the above percentages. CopyfigM 2011. woMJMMHoa com
Question: How many 12 THHN conductors can be installed in

R a c e w a y Cross-Sectional A r e a
trade size ^ electrical metallic tubing? Figure 300-61 Chapter 9 - Table 4
(a) 12 (b) 13 (c) 14 (d)16
Answer: (d) 16 conductors [Annex C, Table C1] Total A r e a 1 0 0 %

0.864 s q in.
Step 1: When sizing a raceway first determine the total área of
conductors (Chapter 9, Table 5 for insulated conductors
and Chapter 9, Table 8 for bare conductors). Figure
300-62 6 0 % Fill
- | 0.519 sq i n .
Step 2: Select the raceway from Chapter 9, Table 4, in accor-
dance with the percent fill listed in Chapter 9, Table 1.
Figure 300-63
Copynghl 2011, www Mlk.Hnlt.eom
Raceway Sizing Figure 300-63

300.17
Question: What trade size Schedule 40 PVC conduit is required

for the following conductors? ?\gwe 300-64
%EMT
3—500 THHN
1—250 THHN
1 6 - 1 2 T H H N conductors 1—3 THHN

[ A n n e x C, Table C.1]
(a) 2 (C)4 (06
When all conductors in a raceway are the s a m e
Answer: (b) 3
size and insulation type, the number of conductors
permitted can be determined by A n n e x C. continuedon nextpage
Copynghl 2011. www MkeHoH com
Figure 300-61
Inserting Conductors in R a c e w a y
Step 1: Determine ttie total área of conductors
Complete Runs
[Ctiapter9, Table 5]: 300.18(A)
500 THHN 0.7073 x3= 2.1219 in.^
250 THHN 0.3970 X 1 - 0.3970 in.^
3 THHN 0.0973 X 1 - + 0.0973 in.^
VIOLATION
Total Area = 2.6162 in.' R a c e w a y s must
be complete prior
Step 2: Select the raceway at 40 percent fill to the instaliation
of conductors.
[Chapter 9, Table 4]:
Trade size 3 Schedule 40 PVC - 2907 sq in. of con-

ductor fill at 40%.
Cap^hfú 2011. wwwi-MikaH<lft.a)R>
R a c e w a y Sizing
300.17 Figure 300-65
300.19 Supporting Conductors in Vertical Race-

ways.
(A) Spacing Intervals. If the vertical rise of a raceway exceeds the

Step 1. Determine the conductor área, Chapter 9, Table 5. valúes of Table 300.19(A), the conductors must be supported at the
500 kcmil = 0.7073 i n . ^ x 3 conductors = 2.1219 in.^ top, or as cióse to the top as practical. Intermedíate support must
250 kcmil = 0.3970 in.2 x 1 conductor = 0.3970 in.^ aiso be provided in increments that don't exceed the valúes of Table
3 A W G = 0.0973 in.2 x 1 conductor = 0.0973 in.^
300.19(A). Figure 300-66
Total área of the conductors = 2.6162 in.^
Step 2. Size the raceway at 4 0 % fill, Chapter 9, Table 4 .
Trade Size 3 P V C at 40 percent fill = 2.907 in.^ .^^Z:^'^
Figure 300-64
300.18 Inserting Conductors in Raceways.

(A) Complete Runs. To protect conductor insulation from abra-
sión during instaliation, raceways must be mechanically completed
behA/een the pulling points before conductors are installed. See
300.10 and 300.12. Figure 300-65
Ex: Short sections of raceways used for the protection of cables from
physical damage aren't required to be installed complete between
outlet, junction, or spiicing points.
(B) Welding. Metal raceways must not be supported, terminated, or

Figure 300-66
connected by welding to the raceway

Author's Comment: The weight of long vertical runs of con- Magnetic materiais naturally resist the rapidly changing mag-
ductors can cause the conductors to actually drop out of the netic fields. The resulting friction produces its own additional
raceway if they aren't properiy secured. There have been many heat—hysteresis heating—in addition to eddy current heating.
cases where conductors in a vertical raceway were released A metal which offers high resistance is said to have high mag-
from the pulling "baslêt" or "grip" {at the top) without being netic "permeability." Permeability can vary on a scale of 100 to
secured, and the conductors fell down and out of the raceway, 500 for magnetic materiais; nonmagnetic materiais have a per-
injuring those at the bottom of the instaliation. meability of one.
Simply put, the molecules of steel and iron align to the polar-
ity of the magnetic field and when the magnetic field reverses,
300.20 Induced Currents In Ferrous Metal Enclo-
the molecules reverse their polarity as well. This bacl<-and-forth
sures and Raceways.
alignment of the molecules heats up the metal, and the more
(A) Conductors Grouped Together. To minimize induction heating the current flows, the greater the heat rises in the ferrous metal
of ferrous metal raceways and ferrous metal enclosures for alternat- parts. Figure 300-68
ing-current circuits, and to maintain an effective ground-fault cur-
rent path, all conductors of a circuit must be installed in the same
Induced Currents in Ferrous Metal Parts
raceway, cable, trench, cord, or cable tray. See 250.102(E), 300.3(B), Hysteresis Heating
300.5(1), and 392.8(0). Figure 300-67 Ferrous Metal
(not a l u m i n u m )
O n e Cycle - AC
Induced Currents in Ferrous Metal Parts

Conductors Grouped Together
300.20(A)
All conductors of a circuit

must be installed in t h e s a m e Ferrous metal (steel a n d iron) molecules align to t h e
raceway, cable, trench, cord, or polarity of the magnetic field, a n d w h e n the field reverses,
cable tray to minimize induction the molecules reverse their polarity. This back-and-forth
heating of ferrous metal alignment of the molecules heats up ferrous metal parts.
enclosures and r a c e w a y s .
Figure 300-68
CopyngW 2011. www HfckeHoh com

When conductors of the same circuit are grouped together,
the magnetic fields of the different conductors tend to cancel
Figure 300-67 each other out, resulting in a reduced magnetic field around the
conductors. The lower magnetic field reduces induced currents
in the ferrous metal raceways or enclosures, which reduces the
Author's Comment: When alternating current (ac) flows
hysteresis heating of the surrounding metal enclosure.
through a conductor, a pulsating or varying magnetic field is
created around the conductor. This magnetic field is constantly
expanding and contracting with the amplitude of the ac current. WARNING: There's been much discussion in the
In the United States, the frequency is 60 cycles per second (Hz). • press on the effects of electromagnetic fields on
Since ac reverses polarity 120 times per second, the magnetic humans. According to the Instituto of Electrical and
field that surrounds the conductor aiso reverses its direction 120 Electronics Engineers (IEEE), there's insufficient information
times per second. This expanding and collapsing magnetic field at this time to define an unsafe electromagnetic field level.
induces eddy currents in the ferrous metal parts that surround
the conductors, causing the metal parts to heat up from hyster-
esis heating.
300 Mike HoiVs iilustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
(B) Single Conductors. When single conductors are installed in non- S p r e a d of Fire or Products of Combustión
300.21
metallic raceways as permitted in 300.5(1) Ex 2, the inductive heat-
ing of the metal enclosure must be minimized by the use of aluminum
locknuts and by cutting a slot between the individual holes through
which the conductors pass. Figure 300-69
Induced Currents in Metal Parts

Single Conductors
300.20(B)
'PHASE^ V^ÍhASeN
O p e n i n g s into or through fire-rated assemblies must

Narrow Slot Cut Between Knockouts be firestopped using a p p r o v e d m e t h o d s to maintain
the fire-resistance rating. ,
Bottom of Metal Enclosure
Copyriom 2011, www MikeHon.com
Figure 300-70
(>ipyñSlW20ii,wi«v<.Mi*eHoitc«ii \
Author's Comment: Fire-stopping materiais are listed for the

Parallel conductors form A l u m i n u m locknuts reduce
specific types of wiring methods and the construction of the
a single conductor. hysteresis heating.
assembiy that they penétrate.
When single conductors are installed in a nonmetallic
raceway, inductive heating o f t h e metal enclosure can be
minimized by cutting a slot between the individual holes Note: Directories of electrical construction matenals published by
through which the conductors pass. qualified testing laboratories contain listing and instaliation restric-
tions necessary to maintain the fire-resistíve rating of assemblies.
Figure 300-69 Outlet boxes must have a horizontal separation not less than 24
in. when installed ín a fire-rated assembiy, unless an outlet box is
Usted for closer spacing or protected by fire-resistant "putty pads" in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Figure 300-71
Note: Because aluminum is a nonmagnetic metal, aluminum parts
don't heat up due to hysteresis heating.
S p r e a d of Fire or Products of C o m b u s t i ó n
Author's Comment: Aluminum conduit, locknuts, and enclo- 300.21 Note
sures carry eddy currents, but because aluminum is nonferrous, 16in.^ • 16 in.
it doesn't heat up [300.20(B) Note], VIOLATION Top View
24 in.
300.21 Spread of Fire or Products of Combustión.
Electrical circuits and equipment must be installed in such a way VIOLATION 7 1! Top View
that the spread of fire or products of combustión won't be substan- 24 in.^
tially increased. Openings into or through fire-rated walls, floors, and
ceilings for electrical equipment must be fire-stopped using meth- OKAY b p View
ods approved by the authority having jurisdiction to maintain the fire-
2 4 in. CapyrtoH 20ia www.MkeHoUcom
resistance rating of the fire-rated assembiy. Figure 300-70 Outlet boxes installed on opposite sides of a fire-rated
assembiy must have a horizontal separation not less
than 24 in. unless listed for closer spacing or protected
by fire-resistant "putty pads."
Figure 300-71

Author's Comments: (B) Ducts Specifically Fabricated for Environmental Air. If neces
sary for direct action upon, or sensing of, the contained air, Type MC
• Boxes installed in fire-resistance-rated assemblies must be
cable that has a smooth or corrugated impervious metal sheath with-
listed for the purpose. If steel boxes are used, they must be
out an overall nonmetallic covering, electrical metallic tubing, flexi-
secured to the framing member, so cut-in type boxes aren't
permitted (UL White Book, Guide Information for Electrical ble metallic tubing, intermedíate metal conduit, or rigid metal conduit
Equipment, www.ul,com/regulators/2008_WhiteBook.pdf). without an overall nonmetallic covering can be installed in ducts spe-
cifically fabricated to transport environmental air. Flexible metal con-
• This rule aiso applies to control, signaling, and Communications
duit in lengths not exceeding 4 ft can be used to connect physically
cables or raceways.
adjustable equipment and devices within the fabricated duct.
- CATV, 820.26
Equipment is only permitted within the duct specifically fabricated to
- Communications, 800.26
transport environmental air if necessary for the direct action upon, or
- Control and Signaling, 725.25
sensing of, the contained air. Equipment, devices, and/or illumination
- FireAlarm,760.3(A)
are only permitted to be installed in the duct if necessary to facilítate
- Optical Fiber, 770.26
maintenance and repair. Figure 300-73
- Sound Systems, 640.3(A)
300.22 Wiring in Ducts Not for Air HandIing, Fab-

Wiring in Ducts Specifically Fabricated
ricated Ducts for Environmental Air, and Other for Environmental A i r
Spaces For Environmental Air (Plenums), The provi- 300.22(B)
sions of this section apply to the instaliation and uses of electrical
wiring and equipment in ducts used for dust, loóse stock, or vapor
removal; ducts specifically fabricated for environmental air, and
spaces used for environmental air (plenums).
(A) Ducts Used for Dust, Loóse Stock, or Vapor. Ducts that trans-
port dust, loóse stock, or vapors must not have any wiring method VIOLATION
installed within them. Figure 300-72 Ducts specifically fabricated to transport
environmental air aren't permitted to contain
any wiring unless necessary for direct action
or sensing of the contained air.
Ducts Used for Dust, Loóse Stock, or Vapor
300.22(A) C o p y r l ^ 2011. www.UtoHoKxom
Figure 300-73
Ducts that transport dust, loóse stock,

(C) Other Spaces Used for Environmental Air (Plenums). This sec-
or vapors must not have any w i h n g
method installed within t h e m . tion applies to spaces used for air-handiing purposes, but not fab-
ricated for environmental air-handIing purposes. This requirement
doesn't apply to habitable rooms or áreas of buildings, the prime pur-
5S¿
pose of which isn't air handiing.
O
Note 1: The spaces above a suspended ceiling or below a raised
floor used for environmental air are examples of the type of space to
Copyright 2011. www.hfikvHoK com which this section applies. Figure 300-74
Figure 300-72 Note 2: The phrase "other space used for environmen-
tal air (plenum)" correlatas with the term "plenum" in NFPA
90A, Standard for tt\e Instaliation of Air-Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems, and other mechanical codes where the
ceiling cavity plenum is used for return air purposes, as well
as some other air-handling spaces.
302 Mike Hoit's iliustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Other Spaces Used for Environmental Air (Plenum) Author's Comments:

300.22(0) Note 1
• PVC conduit [Article 352], electrical nonmetallic tubing [Article
Air 362], liquidtight flexible conduit, and nonmetallic cables aren't
Handler permitted to be installed in spaces used for environmental
Environmental Air Space
) (Plenum) . air because they give off deadly toxic fumes when burned or
i i I ^-Suspended ,, i i i Return A i r G r i l l ^ t t T superheated.
Ceiiing
• Plenum-rated control, signaling, and Communications cables
The space above a dropped ceiling or below and raceways are permitted in cavity plenum space: Figure
a raised floor, used for environmental air are
300-76
examples of "other spaces used for
i
environmental air (plenums)." - CATV, 820.179(A)
Cop™MZ011,ww*.MiKeHoB.com \ RaíSCd FlOOr - Communications, 800.21
I I \ ^ (not in ITE room) | ^ - Control and Signaling, 725.154(A)
- FireAlarm, 760.7
Environmental Air Space (Plenum) ^
- Optical Fiber Cables and Raceways, 770.113(0)
Figure 300-74 - Sound Systems, 640.9(C) and 725.154(A)
• Any wiring method suitable for the condition can be used in
Author's Comment: For the purpose of this book, when a space not used for environmental air-handling purposes.
the NEC references "other space used for environmental air Figure 300-77
(plenum)," the term cavity plenum space' will be used.
S p a c e Used for Environmental Air (Plenum)

(1) Wiring Methods. Electrical metallic tubing, rigid metal conduit,
Wiring Methods Permitted
intermedíate metal conduit, armored cable, metal-ciad cable with- 300.22(C)(1)
out a nonmetallic cover, and flexible metal conduit can be installed in
cavity plenum space. If accessible, surface metal raceways or metal
wireways with metal covers can be installed in cavity plenum space.
Figure 300-75 Plenum
Suspended Air
Ceiling Handler
Spaces Used for Environmental Air ÍPIenum)

• • • • t
S Wiring Methods Permitted
Plenum-rated control, signaling, and Communications
300.22(C)(1)
cables are permitted in p l e n u m s p a c e :
• C A T V , 820.179(A)
Environmental • C o m m u n i c a t i o n s , 800.21
Air Space • Control and Signaling, 725.154(A)
(Plenum) • F i r e A l a r m , 760.7
• Optical Fiber Cables and R a c e w a y s , 770.113(C)
m • S o u n d Systems, 640.9(C) and 725.154(A)
Wihng methods permitted in a space

used for environmental air are: Figure 300-76
EMT Type A C Cable
R M C Type M C Cable without N M cover
IMC F M C
Cop/DgOt 2011, w * w M.keHoll.coin
Figure 300-75

Space Not Used for Environmental Air (3) Equipment. Electrical equipment with metal enclosures is permit-
Wiring Methods Permitted
300.22(C)(1) ted to be installed in cavity plenum space.
Author's Comment: Examples of electrical equipment per-

mitted in cavity plenum space would be air-handiers, junction
boxes, dry-type transformers; however transformers must
not be rated not over 50 kVA when located in hollow spaces
[450.13(6)]. Figure 300-79
| i J A | Suspended Air t Return
l^^^^^^êilin^^ Handler k Air
Space Used for Environmental Air (Plenum) - Equipment

300.22(Cm
A space not used for environmental
1
air-handling purposes has no wiring Environmental
method restrictions. Air Space
(Ptenum)
I
Copyright 2011. www MikaHoH.coni
Transformers rated over

50 k V A a r e not permitted in Suspended
hollow spaces [450.13(B)]. Ceiling
Figure 300-77
Electrical equipment with
metal enclosures is
permitted in plenum space.
(2) Cable Tray Systems. C o p y n ) ^ 1011. www UfteHoK cMn
(a) Metal Cable Tray Systems. Metal cable tray systems can be
installed to support the wiring methods and equipment permitted by Figure 300-79
this section. Figure 300-78
300.23 Paneis Designed to Allow Access. Wihng

Metal Cable Tray Systems ín Other Spaces cables, and equipment installed behind paneis must be located so the
Used for Environmental Air (Plenum)
3Qa22fC)f2JfaJ paneis can be removed to give access to electrical equipment. Figure
300-80
i I
'i Author's Comment: Access to equipment must not be hindered

by an accumulation of cables that prevent the removal of sus-
Environmental Air Space (Plenum) Cable Tray pended-ceiling panels. Control, signaling, and Communications
cables must be located and supported so the suspended-ceiling
panels can be moved to provide access to electrical equipment.
Metal cable trav systems are permitted in
other spaces used for environmental air • CATV Coaxial Cable, 820.21
(plenums) to support wiring methods and
cable types permitted in other spaces • Communications Cable, 800.21
used for environmental air fplenums). • Control & Signaling Cable, 725.21
• Fire Alarm Cable, 760.7
C í i P í T ^ 2011. www.MikeHoH c o n
• Optical Fiber Cable, 770.21
• Audio Cable, 640.5
Figure 300-78
Panels Designed to A l l o w A c c e s s
300.23
^ . ^
Equipment Behind
Removable Panels
Wiring a n d equipment behind panels

designed to allow access must b e
located so the panels c a n b e r e m o v e d
to give access to equipment.
R e m o v a b l e Panel
Copyright 2011. «iww MiKehtoll.com
Figure 300-80

Conductors for -
General Wiring
INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 310—CONDUCTORS FOR GENERAL WIRING
This article contains the general requirements for conductors, such as insulation markings, ampacity ratings, and conditions of use. Article
310 doesn't apply to conductors that are part of flexible cords, fixture wires, or to conductors that are an integral part of equipment [90.7
and 300.1 (B)].
People often make errors in appiying the ampacity tables contained in Article 310. If you study the explanations carefully, you'll avoid
common errors such as appiying Table 310.15(B)(17) when you should be appiying Table 310.15(B)(16).
Why so many tables? Why does Table 310.15(B)(17) list the ampacity of 6 THHN as 105 amperes, yet Table 310.15(B)(16) lists the same
conductor as having an ampacity of only 75 amperes? To answer that, go back to Article 100 and review the definition of ampacity. Notice
the phrase "conditions of use." These tables set a máximum current valué at which premature failure of the conductor insulation shouldn't
occur during normal use, under the conditions described in the tables.
The designations THHN, THHW, RHH, and so on, are insulation types. Every type of insulation has a limit to how much heat it can withstand.
When current flows through a conductor, it creates heat. How well the insulation around a conductor can dissipate that heat depends on
factors such as whether that conductor is in free air or not. Think about what happens when you put on a sweater, a jacket, and then a
coat—all at the same time. You heat up. Your skin can't dissipate heat with all that clothing on nearly as well as it dissipates heat in free air
The same principal applies to conductors.
Conductor insulation aiso fails with age. That's why we conduct cable testing and take other measures to predict failure and replace certain
conductors (for example, feeders or critical equipment conductors) while they're still within design specifications. But conductor insulation
failure takes decades under normal use—and it's a maintenance issue. However, if a conductor is torced to exceed the ampacity listed in
the appropriate table, and as a result its design temperature is exceeded, insulation failure happens much more rapidly—often catastrophi-
cally. Consequently, exceeding the allowable ampacity of a conductor is a serióos safety issue.
PART I. GENERAL í ü Dry and Damp Locations. Insulated conductors typically used in
dry and damp locations include THHN, THHW, THWN, or THWN-2.
310.1 Scope. Article 310 contains the general requirements for
conductors, such as insulation markings, ampacity ratings, and their Author's Comment: Refer to Table 310.104 for a complete list
use. This article doesn't apply to conductors that are an integral part of conductors that may be installed in dry or damp locations.
of equipment [90.7 and 300.1 (B)].
(C) Wet Locations. Insulated conductors typically used in wet loca-
tions include:
PART II. INSTALLATION (2) Types THHW, THWN, THWN-2, XHHW, or XHHW-2
310.10 Uses Permitted. Conductors described in 310.104 can Author's Comment: Refer to Table 310.104 for a complete list
be used in any oí the wiring methods recognized in Chapter 3 as per- of conductors that may be installed in wet locations.
mitted in ms Code [110.8].
Conductors for General Wiring 310.10
(D)^Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight. Insulated conductors and Conductors in Parallel

cables exposed to the direct rays of the sun must be: ^ Conductor Characteristics
310.10(H)(2)
(1) Listed as sunlight resistant or marked as being sunlight resistant.
W h e n conductors are run in
Figure 310-1
parallel, cun-ent must be evenly
distributed a m o n g the individual
parallel conductors by requiring all
conductors of the parallel set to;
• Be the s a m e length
• Be m a d e of the s a m e matehal
• H a v e the s a m e insulation
• Terminate in the s a m e manner
Copynghl 2011, W W M P4i«eHon com
Figure 310-2
(1) Be the same length.
(2) Consist of the same conductor material (copper/aluminum).
(3) Be the same size in circular mil área (minimum 1/0 AWG).
Figure 310-1 (4) Have the same type of insulation (like THHN).
(5) Terminate in the same method (set screw versos compression).

Author's Comment: SE cable and the conductors contained
in the cable are listed as sunlight resistant. However, according Author's Comment: Conductors aren't required to have the
to the UL listing standard, the conductors contained in SE cable same physical characteristics as those of another ungrounded or
aren't required to be marked as sunlight resistant. neutral conductor to achieve balance.
(2) Covered with insulating material, such as tape or sieeving mate- (3) Sepárate Raceways or Cables. Raceways or cables containing
riais that are listed as being sunlight resistant or marked as being parallel conductors must have the same electrical characteristics and
sunlight resistant. the same number of conductors. Figure 310-3
(G) Corrosive Conditions. Conductor insulation must be suitable for

Author's Comment: If one set of parallel conductors is installed
any substance to which it may be exposed that may have a detri- in a metallic raceway and the other conductors are installed in
mental effect on the conductor's insulation, such as oil, groase, vapor, PVC conduit, the conductors in the metallic raceway will have
gases, fumes, liquids, or other substances. See 110.11. an increased opposition to current flow (impedance) as com-
pared to the conductors in the nonmetallic raceway. This results
(H) Conductors in Parallel.
in an unbalanced distribution of current between the parallel
(I) General. Ungrounded and neutral conductors can be connected in conductors.
parallel, only in sizes 1/0 AWG and larger.
Parallel sets of conductors aren't required to have the same physical
@ Conductor Characteristics. When circuit conductors are installed
characteristics as those of another set to achieve balance.
in parallel, the conductors must be connected so that the current
will be evenly distributed between the individual parallel conductors
by requiring all circuit conductors within each parallel set to: Figure
310-2

310.10 Conductors for General Wiring
Conductors in Parallel (4) Conductor Ampacity Adjustment. Each current-carrying con-

Sepárate Cables or R a c e w a y s ductor of a paralleled set of conductors must be counted as a current-
310.10(H}(3}
carrying conductor for the purpose of conductor ampacity adjustment,
in accordance with Table 310.15{B)(3)(a). Figure 310-5
R a c e w a y s containing parallel
conductors must have the s a m e
Conductors in Parallel
electrical characteristics and t h e
Conductor A m p a c i t y Adjustment
s a m e n u m b e r of conductors. 310.10(H)(4)
Two Parallel Sets

Six Current-Carrying Conductors
(Seven if Neutral is Current-Carrying)
Copyngni Z011. M<keHolt com
Figure 310-3 Each current-carrying conductor

of a paralleled set of conductors
must be counted as a current-
Author's Comment: For example, a 400A feeder with a neutral carrying conductor.
load of 240A can be paralleled as follows: Figure 310-4
CopyngTnl 2011. www M«ieHo« cnm

• Phase A, Two—250 kcmil THHN aluminum, 100 ft
• Phase B, Two—3/0 THHN copper, 104 ft
Figure 310-5
• Phase C, Two—3/0 THHN copper, 102 ft
• Neutral,Two—1/0 THHN aluminum, 103 ft
• Equipment Grounding Conductor, Two—3 AWG copper, 101 (5) Equipment Grounding Conductors. The equipment grounding
ft* conductors for circuits in parallel must be sized in accordance with
250.122(F). Figure 310-6
*The minimum 1/0 AWG requirement doesn't apply to equipment
grounding conductors [310.10(H)(5)].
Conductors in Parallel
E q u i p m e n t Grounding Conductor
Conductors in Parallel - Sepárate Cables or Raceways
310.10{H)(5}
310.10(H)(3)
Okay 600A 600A

P/?ase/4Seí; Protection Protection
2- 250 kcmil AL, 100 ft long
Pilase B Set:
2- 3/0 A W G C U , 1 0 4 f t l o n g Parallel L
Phase C Set: Conductors
2-3/0 AWG CU, 102ftlong
Neutral Set:
2 - 1 / 0 A W G AL, 103 ft long
Equipment Ground Set: Copynghl ZOIt. www
2 - 3 A W G C U , 101 f t l o n g CopyOBWaOll
T h e e q u i p m e n t grounding conductor in each
raceway is sized to 250.122 b a s e d o n t h e rating
For current to be evenly distributed between of the overcurrent device. 6 0 0 A = 1 A W G
the individual parallel conductors, each conductor
(within a parallel set) must be identical to each other. Figure 310-6
Figure 310-4
Author's Comment: The minimum 1/0 AWG paraliei conduc- (2) Conductor Ampacity—Lower Rating. Where more than one
tor size rule of 310.10(H) doesn't apply to equipment grounding ampacity applies for a given circuit length, the lowest valué must be
conductors. used. Figure 310-8
(6) Equipment Bonding Jumpers. Equipment bonding jumpers are

sized in accordance with 250.102.
Conductor Ampacity - Lower Rating
310.15(A)(2)
Author's Comment: The equipment bonding jumper isn't
required to be larger than the largest ungrounded circuit con- Lower A m p a c i t y o n Roof
Higher A m p a c i t y 12 T H W N - 2 = 17.40A ( 3 0 A x 0.58)
ductors suppiying the equipment. on Wall
12 T H W N - 2 = 3 0 A
310.15 Conductor Ampacity.
Author's Comment: According to Article 100, ampacity means

the máximum current, in amperes, a conductor can carry con-
tinuously, where the temperature of the conductor won't be
raised in excess of its insulation temperature rating. Figure
310-7 W h e r e more than o n e ampacity rating applies to a
single conductor length, the lower ampacity must be
used for the entire circuit. Entire circuit is rated 17.40A.
g Ampacity Figure 310-8

Article 100 Definition
3 T H W N - 2 Rated 115A at 90°C
115AX I.OOx 1.00 = 115A
Ex: When different ampacities apply to a length of conductor, the

• 3 current-carrying conductors
• Ambient Temperature 86°F higher ampacity is permitted for the entire circuit if the reduced
ampacity length doesn't exceed 10 ñ and its length doesn't exceed
3 T H W N - 2 Rated 115A at 90*^C 10 percent of the length of the higher ampacity. Figures 310-9 and
115AX 0.87 X 0.80 = 80A 310-10
5 current-carrying conductors
Ambient Temperature 110°F
Conductor Ampacity
The máximum current, in a m p e r e s , a conductor Higher Rating
can carry continuously, under the conditions of use
310.15(A)(2)Ex
[310.15] without exceeding its temperature rating.
60 ft
Figure 310-7 55 ft 5ft
Higher A m p a c i t y ; Lower Ampacity

(A) General Requirements. 8 A W G = Rated 55A at 90°C 4 ^ 8 A W G = 31.9A^
[TbI 310.15(B)(16)] I (55AX0.58)
(1) Tables for Engineering Supervisión. The ampacity of a conduc-
tor can be determined either by using the tables in accordance with Entire Circuit
310.15(6), or under engineering supervisión as provided in 310.15(C). Copyighl 2011. •vvfwMikeHoll.com
Ampacity = 55A
T h e higher ampacity can be used if the length of

Note 1: Ampacities provided by this section don't take voltage drop the lower ampacity isn't more than 10 ft, a n d it isn't
into consideration. See 210.19(A) Note 4, for branch circuits and longer than 10 percent of the higher ampacity length.
215.2(0) Note 2, for feeders.
Figure 310-9

Conductor A m p a c i t y - Higher Rating Conductor A m p a c i t y

310.15(A)(2)Ex Correction and Adjustment
310.15(B) and Table 310.15(B)(16)
Lower A m p a c i t y o n Roof
Higher Ampacity 8 T H W N - 2 = 31.90A {55A x 0.58)
on Wall . This raceway contains only
8 THWN-2 = 55A 13 current-carrying conductors.
Table 310.15(B)(16) ampacity is based o n an

ambient temperature of 86°F and no more than
3 current-carrying conductors bundied together.
Conductor Ampacity Adjustment
Í
Ambient j¡£,^._^,jr* ^ Conductor
Conductor
The higher ampacity can be used if the length of the Temperature J f f W B ^ B l H Bundiing ¿wWfTS^
lower ampacity isn't more than 10 ft, a n d it isn't longer If the ambient temperature is If the n u m b e r of current-
than 10 percent o f t h e higher ampacity length. above 86°F or below 78°F, the carrying conductors
conductor ampacity changes. exceeds 3, the conductor
[Table 310.15(B)(2)(a)]. ampacity decreases
Figure 310-10
Copynghl 201V www.MkeHott com [Table 310.15(B)í3j(a)].
Rgure 310-11
(3) Insulation Temperature LImitation. Conductors must not be
used where the operating temperature exceeds that designated for
the type of insulated conductor involved.
Conductor A m p a c i t y - Temperature Correction Adjustment
310.15(B)(2)(a)
Note 1: The insulation temperature rating of a conductor [Table
310.104(A)] is the máximum temperature a conductor can withstand R a c e w a y o n roof with four 10 T H W N - 2 . T h e ambient
over a prolongad time period without serious degradation. The main temperature is 150°F (90°F + 60°F [310.15(B)(3)(c)].
factors to consider for conductor operating temperature include:
(1) Ambient temperature may vary along the conductor length as

well as from time to time [Table 310.15(B)(2)(a)].
rsi
(2) Heat generated internally in the conductor—load current flow.
(3) The rate at which generated heat dissipates into the ambient
médium.
10 T H W N - 2 rated 40A, TbI 310.15(B)(16) at 90°C
(4) Adjacent load-carrying conductors have the effect of raising Ampacity = 4 0 A x 0.58 x 0.80
Ampacity = 18.56A
the ambient temperature and impeding heat dissipation [Table
310.15(B)(3)(a)]. üá-i . .-.
Figure 310-12
Note 2: See 110.14(0(1) for the temperature limitation of
terminations.
(2) Conductor Ampacity Ambient Temperature Correction. When
(B) Ampacity Table. The allowable conductor ampacities listed in conductors are installed in an ambient temperature other than 78°F
Table 310.15(B)(16) are based on conditions where the ambient tem- to 86°F, the ampacities listed in Table 310.15(B)(16) must be cor-
perature isn't over 86°F, and no more than three current-carrying rected in accordance with the multipliers listed in Table 310.15(B)(2)
conductors are bundied together. Figure 310-11 M : Figure 310-13
The temperature correction and adjustment factors apply to the

conductor ampacity, based on the temperature rating of the conductor
insulation in accordance with Table 310.15(B)(16). Figure 310-12
Conductor Ampacity - Ambient Temperature

Question: What's the corrected ampacity of 3/0 THHN/THWN
310.15(B)(2)(a}
conductors in a dry location if the ambient temperature is
3-12 THHN
108°F?
Rated 30A
(a) 173A (b) 196A (c)213A 241A
Answer: (b) 196A

Conductor Ampacity [90X] = 225A
Correction Factor [Table 310.(B)(2)(a)] = 0.87
Corrected Ampacity = 225A x 0.87
Corrected Ampacity = 196A
Ambient Temperature Ambient Temperature Ambient Temperature
150OF 860F (30OC) 50OF
m°C Table Ampacity 90OC Table Ampacity 90OC Table Ampacity
Correction Factor = Correction Factor = Correction Factor = Question: What's the corrected ampacity of 3/0 THHN/THWN
58% (0.58) 100% (1.00) 115% (1.15) conductors in a wet location if the ambient temperature is
30 Table amps x 0.58 30 Table amps x 1.00 30 Table a m p s x 1 1 5
Ampacity - 17.4A Ampacity = 30A Ampacity = 34,5A 108°F?
Ambient Temperature Ambient Temperature 86°F, Ambient Temperature
Ovar 860F. Ampacity Remains Below 8 6 0 F , (a) 164A (b) 196A (c}213A (d)241A
Ampacity is Lower the Same Ampacity is Higher
Answer: (a) 164A

Figure 310-13 Conductor Ampacity [75X] = 200A
Correction Factor [Table 310.(B)(2)(a)] = 0.82
Corrected Ampacity = 200A x 0.82
Tabla 310.15(B)(2)(a) Ambient Temperature Correction Corrected Ampacity = 164A
Ambient Ambient Correction Correction

Conductor Ampacity Adjustment.
Temperature Temperature Factor 75°C Factor 90°C
!F !C Conductors Conductors (a) Four or More Current-Carryíng Conductors in a Raceway or
50 or less 10 or less 1.20 1.15 Cable. Where four or more current-carrying power conductors are in
a raceway longer than 24 in. [310.15(B){3)(a)(3)], or where cables are
51-59T 11-15°C 1.15 1.12
bundied for a length longer than 24 in., the ampacity of each conduc-
60-68°F 16-20°C 1.11 1.08
tor must be reduced in accordance with Table 310.15(B)(3)(a).
69-77°F 21-25°C 1.05 1.04
78-86°F 26-30X 1.00 1,00

Table 310.15(B)(3)(a) Conductor Ampacity
Adjustment for More Than Three Current-
87-95T 31-35°C 0.94 0.96
Carrying Conductors in a Raceway or Cable
96-104T 36-40°C 0.88 0.91
Number of Conductors' Adjustment
105-113°F 41-45°C 0.82 0.87
4-6 0.80 or 80%
114-122°F 46-50°C 0.75 0.82
7-9 0.70 or 70%
123-13rF 51-55X 0,67 0.76
10-20 0.50 or 50%
132-140°F 56-60°C 0.58 0.71
141-149°F 0.47 21-30 0.45 or 50%

61-65°C 0.65
150-158°F 66-70°C 0.33 0.58 31-40 0.40 or 40%
159-167°F 71-75X 0.00 0.50 41 and above 0.35 or35%
168-176T 76-80'^C 0.00 0.41 'Number of conductors is the total number of conductors in the raceway or
cable adjusted in accordance with 310.15(B)(5) and (6).
177-185T 81-85°C 0,00 0.29

Author's Comment: Conductor ampacity reduction is required Conductor A m p a c i t y - A d j u s t m e n t Factor

310.15(B)(3)(a)(2)
wlien four or more current-carrying conductors are bundied
because tieat generated by current flow is not able to dissipate
as quickiy as three or fewer current-carry conductors, Figures
310-14 and 310-15
Conductor Ampacity A d j u s t m e n t Factor

310.15(B)(3)(a)
No Ampacity Adjustment Ampacity Adjustment
Three or Fewer Conductors Factor = 7 0 %
C o n d u c t o r ampacity adjustment of Table

310.15(B)(3)(a) d o not apply to conductors in
raceways having a length not exceeding 2 4 in.
Figure 310-16
(4} Conductor ampacity adjustment of Table 310.15(B)(3)(a) does not

Conductors have more surface apply to conductors within Type AC or Type MC cable under the
Bundied conductors
área for heat dissipation. following conditions: Figure 310-17
have heat held in
Copyright 2011, www MikeHo«.com
by other conductors.
Figure 310-14
Conductor A m p a c i t y - Table 310.15{B)(16)
A d j u s t m e n t Factor - A C and M C Cables
310.15(B)(3)(a)(4)
Conductor A m p a c i t y A d j u s t m e n t Factor
310.15(B)(3)(a) and Table 310.15(B)(16) Ampacity adjustment doesn't apply
to Type AC or MC cable when:
Raceway contains 4 current-carrying (a) Cable has no outer jacket.
conductors. T h e Table 310.15(B)(3)(a) fb) Each cable has no more than
adjustment factor is 0.80. three current-carrying conductors.
fe) The conductors are 12 AWG copper
(d) No more than 20 current-carrying
conductors are installed without
maintaining spacing for a continuous
length longer than 24 in.
If more than 20 current-carrying

conductors are bundied, a 60%
Copyright 2011. WMW.IiíeieHoltcan)
ampacity adjustment factor applies.
12 THWN-2 rated 30A, TbI 310.15(B)(16) at 90°C
Ampacity = 3 0 A x 0.80 [Table 310.15(B)(3)(a)] Figure 310-17
Ampacity = 24A
Figure 310-15 (a) The cables don't have an outer jacket,
(b) Each cable has no more than three current-carrying conductors,
(1) Conductor ampacity adjustment of Table 310.15(B)(3)(a) does not (c) The conductors are 12 AWG copper, and
apply to conductors installed in cable trays, 392.80 apply.
(d) No more than 20 current-carrying conductors (ten 2-wire cables
(2) Conductor ampacity adjustment of Table 310.15(B)(3)(a) does not or six 3-wire cables) are installed without maintaining spacing for
apply to conductors in raceways having a length not exceeding a continuous length longer than 24 in.
24 in. Figure 310-16
Mike Hoit's iiiustrated Guide to Understanding ttie 2011 Nationai Eiectricai Code, Voiume 1
(5) Ampacity adjustment of 60 percent applies to conductors within Circular R a c e w a y s Exposed to Sunlight on Roofs
A m b i e n t Temperature Adjustments
Type AC or Type MC cable without an overall outer jacket under 310.15(B)(3}(c)
the following conditions: Ambient
The raceway is 3 / 4 in. above Temperature
(fa) The number of current-carrying conductors exceeds 20. the roof, so a d d 4 0 O F to the is 9 0 ° F
ambient temperature.
(c) The cables are stacked or bundied longer than 24 in. without
spacing being maintained. 8 THWN-2
Ampacity?
(c) Circular Raceways Exposed to Sunlight on Rooftops. When
appiying ampacity adjustment correction factors, the ambient temper-
ature adjustment contained in Table 310.15{B)(3)(c) is added to the Table 310.15(B)(16) ampacity, 8 T H W N - 2 = 55A
Adjusted Temperature:
outdoor ambient temperature for conductors installed in circular race-
90OF + 40OF [Table 310.15{B)(3}(c)] = 130OF
ways exposed to direct sunlight on or above rooftops to determine Temp Con-ection Factor = 0.76 [Table 310.15{B)(2)(a)]
the applicable ambient temperature for ampacity correction factors N e w A m p a c i t y = 5 5 A x 0.76 = 41.80A
in Table 310.15(B)(2)(a) or Table 310.15(B)(2)(b). Figures 310-18 and
Figure 310-19
310-19
Table 310.15(B)(3)(c) Ambient Temperature

Circular Raceways Exposed to Sunlight on Roofs
Ambient Temperature Adjustments Adder for Raceways On or Above Rooftops
310.15(Bm(c)
Distance of Raceway Above Roof C° F°
Ambient Temperature
is 90°F
0 to y? in. 33 60
' The raceway is 3/4 in. above
Above in. to 3/2 in. 22 40
the roof, so add 40OF to the
, ambient temperature. Above 3y2¡n.to12in. 17 30
Copyright 2011. " w * MIkoHon Com
Above 12 in.to 36 in. 14 25
Table 310.15{B)(16) ampacity. 6 T H W N - 2 = 75A

Adjusted Temperature: Author's Comment: This rule requires the ambient temperature
90°F + 40OF [Table 310.15(B)(3}(c)] = 130°F
used for ampacity correction to be adjusted where conductors or
Temp Correction Factor = 0.76 [Table 310.15(B)(2)(a)]
New Ampacity = 7 5 A x 0.76 = 5 7 A cables are installed in a circular raceway on or above a rooftop
and the raceway is exposed to direct sunlight. The reasoning
Figure 310-18 is that the air inside circular raceways in direct sunlight is
significantly hotter than the surrounding air, and appropriate
ampacity corrections must be made in order to comply with
Note 1: See the ASHRAE Handbook—Fundamentáis (www.ashrae. 310.10.
org) as a source for the average ambient temperatures in various
locations. (5) Neutral Conductors.
(a) The neutral conductor of a 3-wire, single-phase, 120/240V

Note 2: The temperature adders in Table 310.15(B)(3)(c) are based
on the results of averaging the ambient temperatures. system, or 4-wire, three-phase, 120/208V or 277/480V wye-con-
nected system, isn't considered a current-carrying conductor for
conductor ampacity adjustment of 310.15(B)(3)(a). Figure 310-20
Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHolt.com • 888.NEC.G0DE (632.2633) 313

Neutral Conductors From the S a m e Circuit (c) The neutral conductor of a 4-wire, three-phase, 120/208\ or
310.15(B)(5)(a)
277/480V wye-connected system is considered a current-carry-
ing conductor for conductor ampacity adjustment of 310.15(B)(3)
120/240V
(a) if more than 50 percent of the neutral load consista of nonlin-
earloads.Figure310-22
15A ih5A
Neutral Conductor of a W y e 4-Wire Circuit

Suppiying Nonlinear Loads
310.15(B)(5)(c)
Cop/ngtil 2011. www MikeHon.coni
100A
Neutral conductors that carry only unbalanced Nonlinear
current from other conductors f r o m the s a m e circuit
aren't considered current-carrying conductors.
Figure 310-20
(b) The neutral conductor of a 3-wire circuit from a 4-wire, three-

phase, 120/208V or 277/480V wye-connected system is con- O d d triplen harmonio currents from nonlinear loads
sidered a current-carrying conductor for conductor ampacity a d d o n t h e neutral conductor a n d the actual current
can be twice the u n g r o u n d e d conductor's current.
adjustment of 310.15(B)(3)(a).
Figure 310-22
Author's Comment: When a 3-wire circuit is supplied from a
4-wire. three-phase, 120/208V or 277/480V wye-connected
system, the neutral conductor carries approximately the same
Author's Comment: Nonlinear loads supplied by a 4-wire,
current as the ungrounded conductors. Figure 310-21
three-phase, 120/208V or 277/480V wye-connected system
can produce unwanted and potentially hazardous odd triplen
harmonio currents (3rd, 9th, 15th, and so on) that can add on
Neutral Conductor of a 3-Wire Circuit the neutral conductor. To prevent fire or equipment damage
From a W y e 4-Wire System from excessive harmonio neutral current, the designer should
310.15(B)(5)(b)
120/208V or 277/480V consider increasing the size of the neutral conductor or install-
ing a sepárate neutral for each phase. For more information,
Current-Carrying Conductor visit www.MikeHolt.com, click on the "Tecbnical" link, then the
"Power Quality" link. Aiso see 210.4(A} Note, 220.61 Note 2,
T h e neutral conductor o f a and 450.3 Note 2.
3-wire circuit from a 4-wire,
w y e system is considered a
current-carrying conductor. (6) Grounding Conductors. Grounding and bonding conductors
aren't considered current carrying. Figure 310-23
Determine the neutral current.
(7) Dweiling Unit Feeder/Service Conductors. For individual dweil-
I NEUTRAL = J{L2^ + L32) - (L2 X L3)
ing units of one-family, two-family, and multifamily dweilings, Table

I NEUTRAL = 7 (1002 + 10Ó2y- 0 0 0 XIOO^
310.15(B)(7) can be used to size 3-wire, single-phase, 120/240V ser-
I NEUTRAL = 1 OOA
vice conductors. Figure 310-24
Figure 310-21
314 Mike Hoit's Iliustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Conductor Ampacity - Grounding a n d B o n d i n g Conductors Service/Feeder Conductor Sizing for

310.15(B)(6) 120/240V Dweiling Unit
310.15(B)(7)
Service conductors for

more than one dweiling
unit must be sized using
Table 310.15(B)(16).
Copvrtghl»1l,w«M.KHi*Hall.com
Equipment grounding and bonding conductors aren't

current-carrying and aren't counted w l i e n appiying the Feeder a n d service conductors for a n individual
provisions of Table 310.15(B)(3)(a). dweiling c a n b e sized using Table 310.15(B)(7).
Service/Feeder Conductor Sizing f o r

120/240V Dweiling Unit Neutral Conductor Sizing. For individual dweiling units of one-family,
310.15(B)(7) two-family, and multifamily dweilings, Table 310.15(B)(7) can be used
to size the neutral conductor of a 3-wire, single-phase, 120/240V ser-
vice or feeder that carries all loads associated with the dweiling unit,
based on the calculated load in accordance with 220.61.
2 3 5 A Calculated Load
CAUTION: Because the service neutral conductor is
4/0 A W G Service a n d
Feeder Conductors Wt^ required to serve as the effective ground-fault cur-
rent path, it must be sized so it can safety carry the
máximum fault current likely to be imposed on it [ 110.10 and
250.4(A)(5)]. This is accomplished by sizing the neutral con-
For individual dweiling units of one-family, two-family, ductor In accordance with Table 250.66, based on the área of
and multifamily dweiling units, Table 310.15(B)(7) c a n the largest ungrounded service conductor [250.24(C)(1)].
be used to size 3-wire, single-phase, 120/240V service
or feeder conductors that supply all loads that are part
of, or associated with, the dweiling unit.
Question: What size service conductors are required if the cal-

Figure 310-24
culated load for a dweiling unit equals 195A, and the máximum
unbalanced neutral load is 10OA ? Figure 310-26 |
Author's Comment: Table 310.15{B)(7) can't be used for ser-
vice conductors for two-family or multifamily dweiling buildings. (a) 1/0AWGand6AWG (b) 2/0 AWG and 4 AWG
Figure 310-25 (c) 3/0AWG and 2AWG (d) 4/0AWG and 1 AWG
Answer: (b) 2/0 AWG and 4 AWG |

Feeder conductors for individual dweiling units aren't required to be
Service Conductor: 2/0AWG rated 200A ¡Table 31015(B)(7)]
sized larger than service conductors sized to 310.15(B)(7} [215.2(A)
Neutral Conductor: 4 AWG is rated 100A in accordance with
Table 3W.15(B}(7). in addition. 250.24(C) requires the neutral
conductor to be sized no smaller than 4 AWG based on 2/0AWG
service conductors in accordance with Table 250.66.
Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHoltcom • 888.NEC.G0DE (632.2633) 315

Conductor Properties - 6 0 0 V or Less S t r a n d e d Conductors

310.104 310.106(C)
Thermoplastic
1Í7 HH = (two H ) 90OC Insulation

I " Nylon Jacket or E q u i v a l e n !
— Rubber
— H = (one H) 750C Insulation
f W e t Locations
Conductor sizes 8 A W G a n d larger must

Table 310.104(A) contains conductor insulation information, be stranded w h e n installed in a raceway.
such as operating temperature and applications. T h e s e
conductors can be used in a n y Chapter 3 wiring m e t h o d . CopyrigM 2011, ww*.Mik^ton.com
Author's Comment: Solid conductors are often used for the

Conductor Properties - 6 0 0 V or Less
grounding electrode conductor [250.62] and for the bonding of
310.104
pools, spas, and outdoor hot tubs [680.26(C)]. Technically, the
Thermoplastic practice of installing 8 AWG and larger solid conductors in a
H = (one H ) 750C Insulation raceway for the protection of grounding and bonding conductors
is a violation of this rule.
i
(D) Insulated. Conductors must be insulated except where specific
2 90°C in Wet/Dry Locations permission allows them to be covered or bare. Figure 310-31
Nylon Jacket or Equivalent
W e t Locations
Table 310.104(A) contains conductor insulation information, Conductors - Insulated

such as operating temperature and applications. These
conductors can be used in any Chapter 3 wiring m e t h o d .
Copyright 20^1. www.MiRoHotl.com
Figure 310-29
310.106 Conductors
(A) Minimum Size Conductors. The smallest conductor permitted for
branch circuits for residential, commercial, and industrial locations is
14 AWG copper, except as permitted elsewhere in this Code.
Author's Comment: There's a misconception that 12 AWG

copper is the smallest conductor permitted for commercial or
industrial facilities. Although this isn't true based on A/fC rules, it
may be a local code requirement. Figure 310-31
(C) Stranded Conductors. Conductors 8 AWG and larger must be

stranded when installed in a raceway. Figure 310-30
Author's Comment: Equipment grounding conductors are per- U n g r o u n d e d Conductor

mitted ío be bare, see 250.118(1). Figure 310-32 Identification
310.110(0)
U n g r o u n d e d conductors must
Types of Equipment Grounding Conductors be clearly distinguishable from
250.118 neutral a n d equipment
grounding conductors.
An equipment g r o u n d i n g conductor
can be any o n e or a combination of
the types listed in 250.118.
Conductors can be solid,

stranded, bare, insulated,
FMC or covered.
limited)
LFMC
limited)
Figure 310-33
N M Cable
MC Cable (Amrior Cable (Annor A C Author's Comments:

Not Listed as EGC) Listed as EGC) Cable
• If the premises wiring system has branch circuits or feed-
Figure 310-32 ers supplied from more than one nominal voltage system,
each ungrounded conductor of the branch circuit or feeder,
if accessible, must be identified by system. The means of
310.110 Conductor Identification. Identification can be by sepárate color coding. marking tape,
tagging, or other means approved by the authority having
(A) Grounded Conductor. Grounded conductors must be identified in
jurisdiction. Such Identification must be permanently posted at
accordance with 200.6.
each panelboard [210.5(C) and 215.12].
(B) Equipment Grounding Conductor. Equipment grounding conduc- • The NEC doesn't require color coding of ungrounded con-
tors must be identified in accordance with 250.119. ductors, except for the high-ieg conductor when a neutral
conductor is present [110.15 and 230.56]. Although not
(C) Ungrounded Conductors. Ungrounded conductors must be
required, electricians often use the following color system for
clearly distinguishable from neutral and equipment grounding con-
power and lighting conductor Identification:
ductors. Figure 310-33
-120/240V, single-phase—black, red, and white
-120/208V, three-phase—black, red, blue, and white
-120/240V, three-phase, delta-connected system—black,
orange, blue, and white
-277/480V, three-phase, wye-connected system—brown,
orange, yellow, and gray; or, brown, purple, yellow, and
gray

ARTICLE
Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and
312 Meter Socl<et Enclosures
INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 312--CABINETS, CUTOUT BOXES, AND METER SOCKET
ENCLOSURES
This article addresses the instaliation and construction specifications for the Items mentioned in its title. In Article 310, we observed that
the conditions of use have an effect on the ampacity of a conductor. Likewise, the conditions of use have an effect on the selection and
application of cabinets, cutout boxes, and meter socket enclosures. For example, you can't use just any enclosure in a wet location or in a
hazardous location. The conditions of use impose special requirements for these situations.
For all such enclosures, certain requirements apply—-regardiess of the use. For example, you must cover any openings, protect conductors
from abrasión, and allow sufficient bending room for conductors.
Notice that Article 408 covers switchboards and panelboards, with primary emphasis on the interior, or "guts" while the cabinet that would be
used to endose a panelboard is covered here in Article 312. Therefore you'll find that some important considerations such as wire-bending
space at termináis of panelboards are included in this article.
Article 312 covers the instaliation and construction specifications for cabinets, cutout boxes. and meter socket enclosures. [312.1].
Author's Comment: A cabinet is an enclosure for either surface mounting or flush mounting and provided with a frame in which a door may
be hung. A cutout box is designed for surface mounting with a swinging door [Article 100]. The industry ñame for a meter socket enclosure
is "meter can."
312.1 Scope. Article 312 covers the instaliation and construc- Cabinets, Cutout B o x e s , and Meter C a n s
312.1
tion specifications for cabinets, cutout boxes, and meter socket enclo-
Screw/Bolt C o v e r Meter Socket
sures. Figure 312-1 Hinged Cover
Enclosure
Author's Comment: A cabinet is an enclosure for either sur-

face mounting or flush mounting and provided with a frame in
which a door may be hung, A cutout box is designed for surface
mounting with a swinging door [Article 100]. The industry ñame
for a meter socket enclosure is "meter can."
lIopyngM 2011. www KMi.Hall com

Panelboard
Cabinet: Cutout Box: Meter Cans;

Enclosure for Enclosure Enclosure
Circuit Breakers for Fuses for Meter
Figure 312-1
320 Mike HoiVs Iliustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and Meter Socket Enclosure 312.5
PART I. INSTALLATION 312.5 Enclosures.
312.2 Damp or Wet Locations. (A) Unused Openings. Openings intended to provide entry for con-
ductors must be adequately closed. Figure 312-3
Enclosures in damp or wet locations must prevent moisture or water
from entering or accumulating wittiin the enclosure, and must be
weatherproof. When the enclosure is surface mounted in a wet loca- U n u s e d R a c e w a y and Cable Openings
tion, the enclosure must be mounted with not less than a in. air 312.5(A)
space between it and the mounting surface. See 300.6(D).
If raceways or cables enter above the level of uninsulated live parts of

an enclosure in a wet location, a fitting listed for wet locations must
be used for termination.
Author's Comment: A fitting listed for use in a wet location

with a sealing locknut is suitable for this application,
£x; The Va in. air space isn 't required for nonmetaiiic equipment, race-
ways, or cables.
U n u s e d cable or r a c e w a y o p e n i n g s must be closed
312.3 installed in Walls. Cabinets or cutout boxes installed with a fitting that provides equivalent protection.
in walls of concrete, tile, or other noncombustible material must be Figure 312-3

installed so that the front edge of the enclosure is set back no more
than Va in. from the finished surface. In walls constructed of wood or
other combustible material, cabinets or cutout boxes must be flush Author's Comment: Unused openings for circuit breakers must
with the finished surface or project outward. be closed by means that provide protection substantially equiva-
lent to the wall of the enclosure [408.7]. Figure 312-4
312.4 Repairing Gaps. Gaps around cabinets and cutout
boxes that are recessed in noncombustible surfaces (plaster, drywail,
or plasterboard) having a flush-type cover, must be repaired so that
there will be no gap more than /a in. at the edge of the cabinet or
cutout box. Figure 312-2
U n u s e d openings for circuit breakers a n d

I switches must be closed using identified
closures o r other a p p r o v e d m e a n s .
Figure 312-4
Gaps around recessed cabinets and cutout boxes must

be repaired s o there are no gaps greater than 1/8th in.
Figure 312-2

312.6 Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and IVIeter Socket Enclosure
(C) Cable Termination. Cables must be secured to the enclosure with Cable Termination N o t Required
312.5(0) Ex
fittings designed and listed for the cable. See 300.12 and 300.15.
Figure 312-5
Min. N M cables can be sieeved if the:

Cable Termination 18 in. a. Cable is fastened within 1 ft.
312.5(0) Max. b. R a c e w a y doesn't penétrate a
lOft structural ceiling.
c. Fittings are at the e n d of
the raceway.
d . R a c e w a y is sealed a n d
fastened in place.
e. Cable sheath is 74 in. inside.
Surface-
Cables must be secured to the f. R a c e w a y is secured.
Mounted
enclosure with fittings d e s i g n e d g. C o n d u c t o r fill is limited to 60%.
Panel
and listed for the cable.
Co()yngM2011. www.MkeHon com
Figure 312-6
312.6 Deflection of Conductors. Enclosures for conductors

must be sized to allow conductors to be deflected in accordance with
Figure 312-5 Table 312.6(A).
Table 312.6(A) Minimum Wire-Bending Space

Author's Comment: Cable clamps or cable connectors must Wire Size (AWG or kcmil) Inches
be used with only one cable, unless that damp or fitting is iden- 8-6 1':
tified for more than one cable. Some Type NM cable clamps are 2
4-3
listed for two Type NM cables within a single fitting {UL White
2 21,
Book, Guide Information for Electrical Equipment, www.ul.com/
1
regulators/2008_Wh iteBook.pdf).
1/0-2/0 3! 2
Ex: Cables with nonmetallic sheaths aren't required to be secured to 3/0-4/0 4

the enclosure if the cables enter the top ofa surface-mounted enclo- 250
sure through a nonflexible raceway not less than 18 in. or more than 300-350 5
10 ft long, if all of the following conditions are met: Figure 312-6 400-500 6
(a) Each cable is fastened within 1 ft from the raceway. 600-700 8
(b) The raceway doesn 't penétrate a structural ceiling.

312.8 Enclosures With Spiices, Taps, and Feed-
(c) Fittings are provided on the raceway to protect the cables Through Conductors. Cabinets, cutout boxes, and meter socket
from abrasión. endosures can be used for conductors as feeding through, spiiced,
(d) The raceway is sealed. or tapping off to other enclosures, switches, or overcurrent devices
where all of the following conditions are met:
(e) Each cable sheath extends not less than J4 in. into the
panelboard. (D The total área of the conductors at any cross section doesn't
exceed 40 percent of the cross-sectional área of the space.
(f) The raceway ís properiy secured.
Figure 312-7
(g) Conductor fill is limited to Chapter 9, Table 1 percentages.
322 Mike HoiVs iiiustrated Guide to Understanding tiie 2011 Nationai Eiectricai Code, Volume 1
Cabinets, Cutout Boxes, and IVIeter Socket Enclosure
Switch and Overcurrent Device Enclosures Switch and Overcurrent Device Enclosures
Spiices. Taps. and Feed-Through Conductors Spiices and Taps
312.8(11 312.812).
. J d
A n enclosure can be used as a
raceway if the conductors don't fill |f-T
the wiring space to more than 4 0 % .
H
! Spiices and taps can be installed in a n
i enclosure if the spiices or taps don't
fill the wiring space to more than 7 5 % .
Copyn((m2011,ww*MrteHa«rom " ^ ^ ^ J
Copyrtaht 2D11, wwwMikeHo«.corn
Service conductors and other feeder conductors

are permitted in the s a m e enclosure [230.7]. Figure 312-8
Figure 312-7
Switch and Overcurrent Device Enclosures

gj The total área of conductors, spiices, and taps installed at any Spiices. Taps. and Feed-Through Conductors
cross section doesn't exceed 75 percent of the cross-sectional

3ir8m
A warning label o n t h e enclosure
área of that space. Figure 312-8 identifies t h e closest disconnect
for feed-through conductors.
(3) A warning label on the enclosure identifies the disconnecting
means for feed-through conductors. Figure 312-9
Copynghl 2011. www UikeHon COm
Service conductors and other feeder conductors

are permitted in t h e s a m e enclosure [230.7].
Figure 312-9
Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHolt.coni • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633)

ARTICLE
Outlet, Device, Pulí and Junction
Boxes; Conduit Bodies; and
314 Handhole Enclosures
INTRODUCTION TO ARHCLE 314—OUTLET, DEVICE, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES; CONDUIT
BODIES; AND HANDHOLE ENCLOSURES
Article 314 contains instaliation requirements for outlet boxes, pulí and junction boxes, conduit bodies, and handhole enclosures. As with
Article 312, the conditions of use have a bearing on the type of material and equipment selected for a particular instaliation. If a raceway is
installed in a wet location, for example, the corred fittings and the proper instaliation methods must be used.
Article 314 provides guidance for selecting and installing outlet and device boxes, pulí and junction boxes, conduit bodies, and handhole
enclosures. Information in this article will help you size an outlet box using the proper cubic-inch capacity as well as calculating the mini-
mum dimensions for larger pulí boxes. There are limits on the amount of weight that can be supported by an outlet box and rules on how
to support a device or outlet box to various surfaces. This article will help you understand these type of rules so that your instaliation will be
compliant with the NEC. As always, the clear illustrations in this unit will help you visualize the finished instaliation.
PART I. SCOPE AND GENERAL 314.3 Nonmetallic Boxes. Nonmetallic boxes can only be
used with nonmetallic cables and raceways.
314.1 Scope. Article 314 contains the instaliation requirements
for outlet boxes, conduit bodies, pulí and junction boxes, and hand- Ex 1: Metal raceways and metal cables can be used with nonmetal-
hole enclosures. Figure 314-1 lic boxes ifall raceways are bonded together in the nonmetallic box
314.4 Metal Boxes. Metal boxes containing circuits that opér-

Outlet Boxes, Conduit Bodies, Pull/Junction ate at SOV or more must be connected to an equipment ground-
Boxes. a n d Handhole Enclosures
ing conductor of a type listed in 250.118 [250.112(1) and 250.148].
Figure 3 1 4 - 2
PART II. INSTALLATION

314.15 Damp or Wet Locations. Boxes and conduit bodies
in damp or wet locations must prevent moisture or water from enter-
ing or accumulating within the enclosure. Boxes, conduit bodies, and
fittings installed in wet locations must be listed for use in wet loca-
tions. Figure 314-3
Article 314 contains t h e instaliation requirements

for outlet boxes, conduit bodies, pulí and junction Author's Comment: If handhole enclosures without bottoms
boxes, a n d handhole enclosures. are installed, all enclosed conductors and any spiices or termi-
nations must be listed as suitable for wet locations [314.30(0)].
Figure 314-1
Outlet, Device, Pulí and Junction Boxes; Conduit Bodies; and Handhole Enclosures 314.16
Metal B o x e s (A) Box Volume Calculations. The volume of a box includes the total
314.4 volume of its assembled parts, inciuding plaster rings, extensión rings,
and domed covers that are either marked with their volume in cubic
inches (cu in.), or are made from boxes listed in Table 314.16(A).
Figure 3 1 4 - 4
Metal boxes containing circuits

that opérate at 5 0 V or more must Box V o l u m e Calculations
be connected t o a n e q u i p m e n t 314.16(A)
grounding conductor.
O o o
oQo O'
o ° Q
Copyrigni 2011, www MikeHoB com

4x1V2in. Box w i t h Box with Box with
S q u a r e Box Plaster Ring Extensión Ring Raised Cover
-1
Figure 314-2
Z. w
3 5
Boxes and Conduit Bodies 21 in.^ 2 4 . 3 in.' 4 2 in.3 2 8 . 5 in.3

in D a m p or W e t Locations
T h e v o l u m e of a box includes t h e v o l u m e of its
314.15 a s s e m b l e d parts that a r e m a r k e d with their c u i n .
or are m a d e f r o m b o x e s listed in Table 3 1 4 . 1 6 ( A ) .
Copyngfil 2011. www lAkBMoK com
Figure 3 1 4 - 4
(B) Box Fill Calculations. The calculated conductor volume deter-

Boxes and fittings installed
mined by (1) through (5) and Table 314.16(6} are added together to
in wet locations must b e
listed for use In w e t locations. determine the total volume of the conductors, devices, and fittings.
Raceway and cable fittings, inciuding locknuts and bushings, aren't
I
VIOLATION counted for box fill calculations. Figure 314-5
Set S c r e w Fitting
[358.42]
Figure 314^3 Box Fill Calculations

314.16(B)
S m a l l fittings, like cable connectors

314.16 Number of 6 AWG and Smaller Conductors
a n d r a c e w a y fittings (locknuts a n d •
in Boxes and Conduit Bodies. Boxes containing 6 AWG and bushings), aren't c o u n t e d for box
s-âller conductors must be sized to provide sufficient free space for fill calculations. i /
aii conductors, devices, and fittings. In no case can the volume of the
Sox, as calculated in 314.16(A), be less than the volume requirement C
as calculated in 314.16(B).
Conduit bodies must be sized in accordance with 314.16(C).
Author's Comment: The requirements for sizing boxes and 11

conduit bodies containing conductors 4 AWG and larger are
contained in 314.28. The requirements for sizing handhole
enclosures are contained in 314.30(A).
Figure 314-5
Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.l\/llkeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 325

314.16 Outlet, Device, Pulí and Junction Boxes; Conduit Bodies; and Handhole Enclosures
Box Fill Calculations - Conductor V o l u m e

Tabte 314.16(B) Volume Allowance 314.16(B)(1}
Required per Conductor
2 - 3 . ^ 4-5
Conductor AWG Volume cu in. 6-7i Device for connecting
to unbroken conductor
18 1.50 loops with stripped
16 1.75 insulation.
14 2.00
12 2.25
10 2.50 Each loop or coil of unbroken

conductor that's 12 in. or longer
8 3.00 is c o u n t e d a s t w o conductors.
6 5.00
E a c h conductor loop less than
Copyiighl 2011, «ww-MitoHoN com
12 in. long is counted a s o n e .
(1) Conductor Volume. Each unbroken conductor that runs through
a box, and each conductor that terminates in a box, is counted as a Figure 314-7
single conductor volume in accordance with Table 314.16{B). Figure
314-6
Ex: Equipment grounding conductors, and up to four 16 AWG ano
smaller fixture wires, can be omitted from box fill calculations if ttiey
enter the box from a domed luminaire or similar canopy, such as a
Box Fill Calculations - Conductor Fill
314.16(B)(1) ceiling paddie fan canopy. Figure 314-€
Eacti c o n d u c t o r of a
spiice is c o u n t e d a s o n e .
Box Fill Calculations - Fixture W i r e s
314.16(B)(1) Ex
Each terminating conductor

is c o u n t e d a s o n e .
Domed
Luminaire or
For this e x a m p l e , there are
a total of six conductors.
Copyrigm 2011, *ww.MikeHo«.com
Figure 314-6 Not m o r e t h a n four fixture wires 16 A W G and

smaller can be omitted f r o m box fill calculations,
if they enter from a d o m e d luminaire or canopy.
Each loop or coil of unbroken conductor having a length of at Ieast

twice the minimum length required for free conductors in 300.14 Figure 314-8
must be counted as hwo conductor volumes. Conductors that origí-

nate and terminate within the box, such as pigtails, aren't counted at
(2) Cable Clamp Volume. One or more internal cable clamps count
all. Figure 314-7
as a single conductor volume in accordance with Table 314.16(B},
based on the largest conductor that enters the box. Cable connec-
Author's Comment: According to 300.14, at Ieast 6 in. of free
tors that have their clamping mechanism outside of the box aren't
conductor, measured from the point in the box where the con-
ductors enter the enclosure, must be left at each outlet, junction, counted. Figure 314-9
and switch point for spiices or terminations of luminaires or

devices.
Box Fill Calculations - C l a m p s Box Fill Calculations - Device Yoke Fill

314,16(B)(2) 314.16(B)(4)
Cable or R a c e w a y
CONNECTORS
O Conductors
Internal Cable
CLAMPS
1 Conductor
One or more internal cable clamps count

as one conductor, based o n t h e largest T h e s e devices all have single g a n g yokes.
conductor entering the box. External
cable connectors don't count for box E a c h device yoke counts as t w o conductors based
fill calculations. o n t h e largest conductor terminating on t h e device.
Copyrigtil 2011, viww.MikeHoK.com CopyiigM 2011. « w * MikeHoK com
(3) Support Fitting Volume. Each luminaire stud or luminaire hickey Each multigang-device yoke counts as two conductor volumes for
counts as a single conductor volume in accordance with Table each gang, based on the largest conductor that terminates on the
314.16(B), based on the largest conductor that enters the box. Figure device in accordance with Table 314.16(B). Figure 314-12
314-10
Box Fill Calculations - Device Yoke V o l u m e

Box Fill Calculations - Supporting Fittings 314.16(B)(4)
314.16(B)(3}
T h e yoke won't fit
in a o n e g a n g
Luminaire Stud device box.
1 Conductor
Each luminaire stud or hickey

counts as 1 conductor, based
on the largest conductor in
the box. Yoke is 4 C o n d u c t o r s ; Yoke is 4 Conductors;'
Total of S e v e n Total of Eight
C o n d u c t o r s in This B o x Conductors in This Box
Luminaire Hickey 3/8 in. Mounting Each multigang device yoke counts a s two conductor
1 Conductor S t e m (not c o u n t e d ) v o l u m e s for e a c h g a n g based on t h e largest conductor
that terminates o n t h e device.
CopvTignt 2011. www.MikeHol1.com
Figure 314-12
Figure 314-10
Author's Comment: Luminaire stems don't need to be counted Author's Comment: A device that's too wide for mounting in
as a conductor volume. a single-gang box, as described in Table 314.16(A), is counted
based on the number of gangs required for the device.
(4) Device Yoke Volume. Each single-gang device yoke (regard-
less of the ampere rating of the device) counts as two conductor vol-
umes, based on the largest conductor that terminates on the device in
accordance with Table 314.16(B). Figure 314-11
Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • vtfww.MikeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633)

(5) Equipment Grounding Conductor Volume. All equipment

Question: How many 14 AWG conductors can be pulled through
grounding conductors in a box count as a single conductor volume
a 4 in. square x 214 in. deep box with a plaster ring with a mark-
in accordance with Table 314.16(B), based on the largest equip-
ing of 3.60 cu in.? The box contains two receptacles, five 12
ment grounding conductor that enters the box. Insulated equipment
AWG conductors, and two 12 AWG equipment grounding con-
grounding conductors for receptacles having insulated grounding ter-
cíucíors. Figure 314-14
mináis (isolated ground receptacles) [250.146(0)], count as a single
conductor volume in accordance with Table 314.16(B). Figure 314-13 (a)3 (b)5 (c}7 (d}9
Answer: (b) 5
Step 1: Determine the volume of the box assembiy [314.16(A)¡:

Box Fill Calculations
Bonding Conductor Fill Box 30.30 cu in. + 3.60 cu in. plaster ring = 33.90 cu in.
314.16(B)(5) A4x4x 21/8 in. box will have a gross volume of 34 cu
in., but the Interior volume is 30.30 cu in., as listed in
O n e or more e q u i p m e n t Table 314.16(A).

grounding conductors
Step 2: Determine the volume of the devices and conductors in
count a s one conductor.
the box:
Cooynghl 20H. ivwwMiKeHodcofti

Two—receptacles 4—12 AWG
Five—12AWG 5—12AWG
A n isolated equipment Two—12 AWG Grounds 1—12 AWG

grounding conductor Total 10—12AWG x 2.25 cu in. = 22.50 cu in.
counts a s a n additional
conductor. Step 3: Determine the remaining volume permitted for the 14
AWG conductors:
Figure 314-13 33.90 cu in. - 22.50 cu in. = 11.40 cu in.
Step 4: Determine the number ofUAWG conductors permitted

in the remaining volume:
Author's Comment: Conductor insulation isn't a factor that's
14 AWG = 2.00 cu in. each [Table 314.16(B)]
considered when determining box volume calculations.
11.40 cu in./2.00 cu in. = 5 conductors
Box Fill Calculations (C) Conduit Bodies.

Example
314.16(B) (2) Spiices. Spiices are permitted in conduit bodies that are legibly
marked by the manufacturar with their volume and the máximum
Existing C o n d u c t o r
number of conductors permitted in a conduit body is limited in accor-
and Device V o l u m e :
Ten 12 A W G dance with 314.16(B).
H o w m a n y 14 A W G
conductors can be a d d e d ? Question: How many 12 AWG conductors can be spiiced ina15
cu in. conduit body? Figure 314-15
CopyrtgW 2011. W¥íw M*>Ho«.com
(^4 (b)6 (0 8 10
Step 1. Volume of box/ring: 30.3 + 3.6 c u in. = 33.9 c u i n .
Step 2. Volume of existing conductors/devices = 22.5 c u i n . Answer: (b) 6 conductors (15 cu in./2.25 cu in.)
Step 3. Space remaining: 33.9 - 22.5 = 11.4 c u in.
Step 4 . Number of 14 A W G a d d e d : 11.4/2.0 c u in. = 5 12AWG = 2.25 cu in. [Table 314.16(B)[
15cuin./2.25cuin. =6
Figure 314-14
Conduit Body - Conductor Spiices Author's Comment Unused cable or raceway openings in
314.16(C)(2) electrical equipment must be effectively closed by fittings that
provide protection substantially equivalent to the wall of the
equipment [110.12(A)]. Figure 314-17
U n u s e d R a c e w a y and Cable Openings

Spiices are only permitted In
3Í4.17(A)
conduit bodies that are legibly
m a r k e d , by the manufacturen Cable o r
with their v o l u m e . Raceway
Knockout Filler
y * " —
Six 12 A W G Conductors (15 c u in./2.25 c u in.)
Plug Filler
CopyTig(it2011 www.Mit>eHol1.<
Figure 314-15
Copyri^2(M1
W e e p (drain) holes, ventilation openings,
a n d other legitímate openings are permitted.
(3) Short-Radius Conduit Bodies. Capped elbows, handy ells, and
senîce-entrance elbows aren't permitted to contain any spiices. U n u s e d cable or r a c e w a y o p e n i n g s must be closed with
fittings that provide equivalent protection [110.12(A)].
Figure 314-16
Figure 314-17
Short Radius Conduit Bodies

314.16(C)(3)
(B) Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies. Raceways and cables must
S o m e t i m e s Called: be mechanically fastened to metal boxes or conduit bodies by fittings
• Jake Elbow designed for the wiring method. See 300.12 and 300.15.
• Short Elbow
• Pulling Elbow
(C) Nonmetallic Boxes and Conduit Bodies. Raceways and cables
• Córner Elbow
must be secureiy fastened to nonmetallic boxes or conduit bodies by
fittings designed for the wiring method [300.12 and 300.15]. Figure
Short-radius conduit bodies
must not contain spiices or taps. 314-18
Spiices can be m a d e in s o m e Conductors That Enter

conduit bodies [314.16(C)(2)]. Nonmetallic B o x e s a n d Conduit Bodies
314.17 (C)
Copyriom 2 0 n , w w * MiwHon com
Figure 314-16
314.17 Conductors That Enter Boxes or Conduit

Bodies.
(A) Openings to Be Closed. Openings through which cables or race-

ways enter must be adequately closed.
R a c e w a y s a n d cables must be secureiy fastened
to nonmetallic boxes or conduit bodies by fittings
d e s i g n e d for the wiring m e t h o d .
Figure 314-18

The sheath of type cable must extend not less than Va in. into the Boxes R e c e s s e d in Walls or Ceilings
314.20
nonmetallic box.
Noncombustible
Author's Comment: Two Type NM cables can terminate in a
Finished Surface
single cable clamp, if the clamp is listed for this purpose.
£x; Type A/M cable terminating to a single-gang (2 Va x 4 in.) device

box isn 't required to be secured to the box if the cable is secureiy fas-
M á x i m u m of V4 in. From
tened within 8 in. ofthe box Figure 314-19 the Finished Surface
CopyngW 2011. www
Nonmetallic Single G a n g Box - N M Cable B o x e s , plaster rings, extensión rings, or listed extenders
314.17(0) Ex must have the front edge set back no more than V4 in.
from t h e noncombustible finished surface.
Figure 314-20
Metal
Studs
B o x e s R e c e s s e d in Walls or Ceilings
374.20
Combustible
Finished Surface
N M cable terminating to a single-gang {2V4 in. x 4 in.)

device box isn't required to be secured to the box if
the cable is secureiy fastened within 8 in. of the box.
Flush With or Project
Figure 314-19 Out From the Surface
314.20 Boxes Recessed in Walls or Ceilings. Boxes

B o x e s , plaster rings, extensión rings, or listed extenders
having flush-type covers that are recessed in walls or ceilings of non- must have the front e d g e flush with, or project out from,
combustible material must have the front edge of the box, plaster the combustible finished surface.
ring, extensión ring, or listed extender set back no more than Va in.
Figure 314-21
from the finished surface. Figure 314-20
In walls or ceilings that are constructed of wood or other combustible

314.22 Surface Extensíons. Surface extensions can only
material, boxes must be installed so the front edge of the enclosure,
be made from an extensión ring mounted over a flush-mounted box.
plaster ring, extensión ring, or listed extender is flush with, or projects
Figure 314-23
out from, the finished surface. Figure 314-21
Ex: A surface extensión can be made from the cover of a flush-
Author's Comment: Plaster rings and extensión rings are avail- mounted box if the cover is designed so it's unlikely to fall off if the
able in a vahety of depths to meet the above requirements. mounting screws become loóse. The surface extensión wiring method
must be flexible to permit the removal of the cover and provide
access to the box interior, and equipment grounding continuity must
314.21 Repairing Noncombustible Surfaces, Gaps
be independent of the connection between the box and the cover.
around boxes with flush-type covers that are recessed in noncom-
Figure 314-24
bustible surfaces (such as plaster, drywail, or plasterboard) must be
repaired so there will be no gap more than V& in. at the edge of the
box. Figure 314-22
Repairing Noncombustible Surfaces A r o u n d Boxes Surface Extensión from a Cover

314.21 314.22 Ex
Extensión f r o m a cover Is permitted if:

Violation • T h e cover is d e s i g n e d not to fall off.
Gap Over • A f l e x i b l e w i h n g m e t h o d is u s e d .
• T h e g r o u n d i n g connection
1/8th in.
is independent from the cover.
Máximum Surface Extensión

1/8th in. Gap From a Cover
Gaps around boxes with flush-type covers that

are recessed in noncombustible surfaces must
be repaired so there will be no g a p greater than
1/8th in. at the edge of the box.
CopyngN 2011. www MkeHo«.com
(2) Braces. Metal braces no less than 0.02 in. thick and wood bracos
Surface Extensions
not less than a nominal 1 in. x 2 in. can support a box.
314.22
ao.c
(C) Finished Surface Support. Boxes can be secured to a finished
surface {drywail or plaster walls or ceilings) by clamps, anchors, or
fittings identified for the purpose. Figure 314-25
Extensión Surface
Ring Extensión
Box Support - Finished Surface ,

314.23(0} ! Fished Cable
Surface extensions f r o m a box must be m a d e f r o m
an extensión ring that's installed over the box. Cut-in B o x
Copyright 2011. www MikeHolt com
Figure 314-23
314.23 Support of Boxes and Conduit Bodies. Boxes

must be secureiy supported by one of the following methods: Bracket Provides Support for Box com^7a^^.
(A) Surface. Boxes can be fastened to any surface that provides ade- B o x e s can be s e c u r e d t o a finished surface by
quate support. c l a m p s , anchors, or fittings identified for the purpose.
(B) structural Mounting. Boxes can be supported from a structural Figure 314-25
member of a building or supported from grade by a metal, plástic, or
wood brace.
(D) Suspended-Ceiling Support. Outlet boxes can be supported
(1) Nails and Screws. Nails or screws can be used to fasten boxes,
to the structural or supporting elements of a suspended ceiling, if
provided the exposed threads of screws are protected to prevent
secureiy fastened by one of the following methods;
abrasión of conductor insulation.

(1) Celling-Framing Members. An outlet box can be secured to sus- Box Support - I n d e p e n d e n t Support W i r e s
314.23(D)(2)
pended-ceiling framing members by boits, screws, rivets, clips, or
other means identified for the suspended-ceiling framing member(s).
Independent support wires
Figure 314-26 can be used to secure
electrical wiring [300.11 (A)].
Box Support - Ceiling Framing M e m b e r s

314.23(D)(1)
Outlet boxes can be s e c u r e d , with fittings identified for I

the p u r p o s e , to ceiling a n d independent support wires "
that are taut a n d secured at both ends.
Outlet boxes can be secured l o Figure 314-27

suspended-ceiling m e m b e r s by
bolts, screws, rivets, clips, or other
m e a n s identified for the purpose.
Box Support - T h r e a d e d Raceways
No Devices or Luminaires
314.23(E)
Enclosure
Figure 314-26 Not Over
1 0 0 cu i n .
36 in.
Author's Comment: If framing members of suspended-ceiling
systems are used to support luminaires, they must be secureiy T w o t h r e a d e d IMC o r R M C can support an
fastened to each other and must be secureiy attached to the outlet box without devices or luminaires, if
building structure at appropriate intervals. In addition, luminaires e a c h raceway is supported within 3 6 in., or
must be attached to the suspended-ceiling framing members
36 in. within 18 in. if all conduits are o n one side.
with screws, bolts, rivets, or clips listed and identified for such
use [410,36(B)].
Cop/right 2011. www
(2) Independent Support Wires. Outlet boxes can be secured, with

fittings identified for the purpose, to the ceiling-support wires. If inde- Figure 314-28
pendent support wires are used for outlet box support, they must be
taut and secured at both ends [300.11 (A)]. Figure 314-27
(1) Intermedíate metal conduit, Type IMC
Author's Comment: See 300.11 (A) on the use of independent (2) Rigid metal conduit, Type RMC
support wires to support raceways and cables.
(3) Rigid polyvinyl chioride conduit, Type PVC
(E) Raceway—Boxes and Conduit Bodies Vl/ithout Devices or (4) Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit, Type RTRC
Luminaires. Two intermedíate metal or rigid metal conduits, threaded
(5) Electrical metallic tubing, Type EMT
wrenchtight into the enclosure, can be used to support an outlet box
that doesn't contain a device or luminaire, if each raceway is sup- (F) Raceway—Boxes and Conduit Bodies with Devices or
ported within 36 in. of the box or within 18 in. of the box if all conduit Luminaires. Two intermedíate metal or rigid metal conduits, threaded
enfries are on the same side. Figure 314-28 wrenchtight into the enclosure, can be used to support an outlet box
containing devices or luminaires, if each raceway is supported within
Ex: Conduit bodies are permitted to be supported by any of the follow-
18 in. of the box. Figure 314-29
ing wiring methods:
Mike HoiVs iliustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Box Support - T h r e a d e d R a c e w a y s Covers a n d Canopies

With Devices and Luminaires 314.25
314.23(F)
[, Two threaded IMC or R M C c a n

support an outlet box with devices Blank cover plates c a n
or luminaires if e a c h r a c e w a y cover a n outlet box.
I I
is supported within 18 i n .
A faceplate or luminaire
VIOLATION can cover a n outlet box.
T h e conduit must be t h r e a d e d
and directly connected t o the box. W h e n a n instaliation is complete, e a c h outlet box
must be provided with a cover, faceplate, luminaire
canopy, lampholder, o r similar device.
CopyrtQMl 2011. wwwMifceHon com
(H) Pendant Boxes. (A) Nonmetallic or Metallic. Nonmetallic covers are permitted on
any box, but metal covers are only permitted if they can be con-
(I) Flexible Cord. Boxes containing a hub can be supported from a
nected to an equipment grounding conductor of a type recognized in
cord connected to fittings that prevent tensión from being transmitted
250.118, in accordance with 250.110 [250.4(A)(3)]. Figure 314^32
to joints or termináis [400.10]. Figure 314-30
Box Support - Pendant Cord

314.23(H)(1)
É
p
Boxes can be supported from a cord K

that's connected to fittings s o that tensión |
isn't transmitted to joints or termináis. tí
i Nonmetallic covers or plates are permitted o n a n y

box, but metallic faceplates, w h e r e u s e d , must be
connected t o a n e q u i p m e n t grounding conductor.
CopyrigM 2011. www.MikeHon.onn
CocyngN 2011, www MikaHolt.com
Figure 314-32
Figure 314-30
Author's Comment: Metal switch faceplates [404.9(B)] and

metal receptacle faceplates [406.6{A)] must be connected to an
Author's Comment: Only cords identified for use as pendants
equipment grounding conductor
in Table 400.4 may be used for pendants.314.25 Covers and
Canopies. When the instaliation is complete, each outlet box
must be provided with a cover or faceplate, unless covered by
a fixture canopy, lampholder, or similar device. Figure 314-31

314.27 Outlet Box. (2) Luminaire Outlets in the Ceiling. Boxes for a luminaire in a ceil-
ing must be designed to support a luminaire weighing a minimum of
(A) Boxes at Luminaire Outlets.
50 Ib. Luminaires weighing more than 50 Ib must be supported inde-
f1) Luminaire Outlets in the Wall. Boxes for a luminaire in a wall pendently of the outlet box unless the outlet box is listed and marked
must be designed for the purpose and marked on the interior of the for the máximum weight to be supported. Figure 314-35
box to indícate the máximum weight of the luminaire if other than 50
Ib. Figure 314-33
Luminaire and Lampholder Outlets in Ceiling
314.27(Am
Luminare and Lampholders - Outlets in t h e Wall
Luminaires over 50 Ib must be

supported independently of the
Lighting outlet boxes in a
lighting outlet box unless the
Boxes and fittings for luminaires a n d lamp- ceiling must be designed
outlet box is listed and marked
holders in a wall must be marked o n t h e to support a luminaire
weighing at Ieast 50 Ib. for the máximum weight of the
interior of the box to indícate the m á x i m u m
luminaire.
weight of the luminaire if other than 5 0 Ib.
Copyright 2011. www MikeHctI com

Figure 314-35
Figure 314-33
(B) Floor Box. Floor boxes must be specifically listed for the purpose.
Figure 314-36
Ex: A wall-mounted luminaire weighing no more than 6 Ib can be sup-
ported to a device box or plaster ring secured to a device box. Figure
314-34 Floor Outlet B o x
314.27(8}
Luminare and Lampholder Outlets in the Wall

314.27(A){1_) Ex I I i
Floor outlet boxes
must be listed
Device Box or for the purpose.
Plaster Ring
Figure 314-36
A wall-mounted luminaire or lampholder weighing no m o r e
than 6 Ib can be supported to a device box or plaster ring.
Figure 314-34
(C) Ceiling Paddie Fan Box. Outlet boxes for a ceiling paddie fan Outlet B o x e s for Utilization Equipment
314.27(0) Ex
must be listed and marked as suitable for the purpose, and must not
support a fan weighing more than 70 Ib. Outlet boxes for a ceiling
paddie fan that weighs more than 35 Ib must include the máximum
weight to be supported in the required marking. Figure 314-37
Outlet Box - Ceiling Paddie Fan

314.27(0}
Utilization e q u i p m e n t 6 Ib or less can b e supported by

any box or plaster ring secured t o a b o x if supported by
at Ieast t w o No. 6 or larger screws.
Copyr>ght2011 www. MikeHolt com
Figure 314-38
Fan outlet boxes must be listed,
marked as suitable for the
purpose, and can't support a
314.28 Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conductors 4
fan that weighs more than 70 Ib.
AWG and Larger. Boxes and conduit bodies containing conduc-
Paddie fans over 70 Ib must b e tors 4 AWG and larger that are required to be insulated must be sized
supported independently of the box.
so the conductor insulation won't be damaged. Figure 314-39
Figure 314-37
Pulí and Junction B o x e s - 4 A W G a n d Larger

314.28
Author's Comment: If the máximum weight isn't marked on
Straight Pulís -I Sections 3 1 4 . 2 8 ( A ) t o (D)
the box, and the fan weighs over 35 Ib, the fan must be sup-
are used to size pulí boxes,
Í
ported independently of the outlet box, Ceiling paddie fans over junction boxes, and conduit
70 Ib must be supported independently of the outlet box. bodies w h e n conductor sizes
4 A W G and larger are used.
1 ¡
Where spare, separately switched, ungrounded conductors are pro-
vided to a ceiling-mounted outlet box, in a location acceptable for a A n g l e Pulís U Pulís
ceiling-suspended (paddie) fan in single or multifamily dweilings, the

outlet box or outlet box system must be listed for the support of a
ceiling-suspended (paddie) fan.
(D) Utilization Equipment. Boxes used for the support of utilization

equipment must be designed to support equipment that weighs a
minimum of 50 Ib [314.27(A)].
Figure 314-39
Ex: Utilization equipment weighing 6 Ib or less is permitted to be
supported by any box or plaster ring secured to a box, provided the
equipment is secured with no fewer than two No. 6 or larger screws.
Figure 314-38
Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • vwm.MikeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633)

Ex: When conductors enter an enclosure with a removable cover, the Pulí Box, Junction Box, a n d Conduit Body Covers
314.28(C)
distance from where the conductors enter to the removable cover
must not be less than the bending distance as listed in Table 312.6(A)
for one conductor per terminal. Figure 314-47
Pulí Box and Conduit Body Sizing - Depth

314.28(A)(2) Ex
Dimensión D
500 kcmil = 6 i n . T h e metal r a c e w a y and enclosure is t h e equipment i
g r o u n d i n g conductor to w h i c h the covers connect. •
Metal c o v e r s f o r pulí b o x e s , junction b o x e s , and conduit

bodies must be connected t o a n e q u i p m e n t grounding
conductor in a c c o r d a n c e with 250.110.
•D
Figure 314-48
The distance from vi^here t h e

conductors enter to the removable
cover can't be less than the Power Distribution Biocks ín Pull/Junction Boxes
bending distance listed in Table 314.28(E)
312.6(A) for one wire per terminal. Power
Distribution
Figure 314-47 Block
(3) Smaller Dimensions. Boxes or conduit bodies smaller than those

required in 314.28(A)(1) and 314.28(A)(2) are permitted, if the enclo-
sure is permanently marked with the máximum number and máxi- Copynghl Z011. « w * P*keHolt ojm
mum size of conductors. Power distribution biocks in pulí and junction boxes must:
(1) Be listed as a power distribution block.
(B) Conductors in Pulí or Junction Boxes. Pulí boxes or junction (2) Be installed in a box with dimensions not smaller than
specifiedin.íhe instaliation instructjons.of the block,
boxes with any dimensión over 6 ft must have all conductors cabled f3) Comply with 312.6 for wire-bending space at termináis
or racked in an approved manner. (4) Have no uninsulated exposed live parts. wtiether the
junction/pull box cover is on or off.
(C) Covers. Pulí boxes, junction boxes, and conduit bodies must have
Figure 314-49
a cover suitable for the conditions. Nonmetallic covers are permitted
on any box, but metal covers are only permitted if they can be con-
nected to an equipment grounding conductor of a type recognized in (3) Wire-Bending Space. The junction box is sized so that the wire-
250.118, in accordance with 250.110 [250.4(A)(3)]. Figure 314-48 bending space requirements of 312.6 can be met.
(E) Power Distribution Block. Power distribution biocks installed in (4) Live Parts. Exposed live parts on the power distribution block
junction boxes over 100 cu in. must comply with the following: Figure aren't present when the junction box cover is removed.
314-49
(5) Through Conductors. Where the junction box has conductors that
(1) Instaliation. Be listed as a power distribution block. don't terminate on the power distribution block(s), the through con-
ductors must be arranged so the power distribution block termináis
(2) Size. Be installed in a box not smaller than required by the instal-
are unobstructed following instaliation.
iation instructions ofthe power distribution block.
Mike Holt's lllustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
314.29 Wiring to be Accessible. Boxes, conduit bodies, and Handhole Enclosure

314.30
tiandhole enclosures must be installed so that the wiring is accessible
without removing any part of the building, sidewaiks, paving, or earth.
H a n d h o l e enclosures must be identified for
Figure 314-50
u n d e r g r o u n d use, a n d be designed a n d installed
to withstand all loads likely to be i m p o s e d .
Wiring in Boxes, Conduit Bodies, a n d H a n d h o l e s

Must be Accessible
314.29
Accessible by \
d Removing Ceiling Panels p ¡ ^
Copyright 20i 1. -ww. WkeHoW.com
Boxes, conduit bodies, a n d handfiole

Figure 314-51
enclosures must be installed so that t h e
wiring contained in t h e m can be m a d e
accessible without removing a n y part of
the building, or excavating sidewaiks, Handhole Enclosure
paving, or the earth. Mechanical R a c e w a y a n d Cable Connection
314.30(B)
Accessible by Accessible by
Removing Device R e m o v i n g Floor Panels Underground raceways a n d cables entering a handhole
enclosure aren't required to be mechanically connected
to the handhole enclosure.
Figure 314-50
Spiices or terminations must

Ex: Listed boxes and handhole enclosures can be buried if covered by be listed a s suitable for w e t
gravel, light aggregate, or noncohesive granulated soil, and their loca- locations [314.30(C)].
tion is effectively identified and accessible for excavation.
314.30 Handhole Enclosures. Handhole enclosures must be

Figure 314-52
identified for underground use, and be designed and installed to with-
stand all loads likely to be imposed on them. Figure 314-51
(C) Enclosure Wiring. Spiices or terminations within a handhole must
(A) Size. Handhole enclosures must be sized in accordance with
be listed as suitable for wet locations [110.14(B)].
314.28{A). For handhole enclosures without bottoms, the measure-
ment to the removable cover is taken from the end of the raceway or (D) Covers. Handhole enclosure covers must have an identifying
cable assembiy. When the measurement is taken from the end of the mark or logo that prominently identifies the function of the enclosure,
raceway or cable assembiy, the valúes in Table 312.6(A) for one wire such as "electric." Handhole enclosure covers must require the use of
to terminal can be used [314.28(A)(2) Ex]. tools to open, or they must weigh over 100 Ib.
(B) Mechanical Raceway and Cable Connection. Underground

raceways and cables entering a handhole enclosure aren't required to
be mechanically connected to the handhole enclosure. Figure 314-52

Metal covers and other exposed conductive surfaces of handhole

H a n d h o l e Enclosure
enclosures must be connected to an equipment grounding con- Bonding Covers a n d E x p o s e d Conductive Surfaces
314,30(D)
ductor sized to the overcurrent device in accordance with 250.122
[250.102(0)]. Metal covers of handhole enclosures containing service Metal covers and other exposed conductive surfaces of
conductors must be connected to an equipment bonding jumper sized handhole enclosures must be connected to an EGC sized
to the overcurrent device using 250.122. If enclosing
in accordance with Table 250.66 [250.92 and 250.102(0)]. Figure service conductors the E G C is sized using Table 250.66.
314-53
Figure 314-53
ARTICLE
320 Armored Cable (Type AC)

INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 320—ARMORED CABLE (TYPE AC)
Armored cable is an assembiy of insulated conductors, 14 AWG through 1 AWG, individuaily wrapped within waxed paper and contained
within a flexible spiral metal sheath. The outside appearance of armored cable looks like flexible metal conduit as well as metal-ciad cable
to the casual observer. This cable has been referred to as "BX®" cable over the years and used in residential wiring in some áreas of the
country.
PART I. GENERAL Author's Comment: The conductors are contained within a

flexible metal sheath that intedocks at the edges, with an internal
320.1 Scope. This article covers the use, instaliation, and con- aluminum bonding strip, giving the cable an outside appearance
struction specifications of armored cable, Type AC. similar to that of flexible metal conduit. Many electricians cali
this metal cable "BX®" The advantages of any flexible cables, as
320.2 Definition. compared to raceway wiring methods, are that there's no limit to
the number of bends between terminations and the cable can be
Armored Cable (Type AC). A fabricated assembiy of conductors in a
quickiy installed.
flexible interlocked metal armor with an internal bonding strip in intí-
mate contact with the armor for its entire length. See 320.100. Figure
320-1

A r m o r e d Cable - Type A C 320.10 Uses Permitted. TypeAC cable ís permitted as follows:
320.2 Definition
(1) Feeders and branch circuits in both exposed and concealed
W a x e d Paper Jute installations.
(2) Cable trays.
(3) Dry locations.
Interlocked Spiral (4) Embedded in plaster or brick, except in damp or wet locations.
Metal Sheath Bonding Strip
(5) Air voids where not exposed to excessive moisture or dampness.
A fabricated assembiy of conductors in a flexible Note: The "Uses Permitted" isn't an all-inclusive list, which indicates
interiocked metal armor with an internal bonding strip that other suitable uses are permitted if approved by the authority
in intímate contact with the armor for its entire length. having jurisdiction.
CopyrigM ?011. www MikeHok com
Author's Comment: Type AC cable is aiso permitted to be

Figure 320-1
installed in a cavity plenum space [300.22(C)(1)].

320.12 Uses Not Permitted. Type AC cable must not be Author's Comments:
installed in any of the following locations:
• 300.4{A)(1) Drilling Holes in Wood Members. When
(1) It subject to physical damage. holes through wood framing members for cables, the edge of
the holes must be not less than VA in. from the edge of the
(2) In damp or wet locations. wood member, Figure 320-3A
(3) In air voids of masonry block or tile walls where such walls are If the edge of the hole is less than I V i in. from the edge, a
exposed or subject to excessive moisture or dampness. V\b in. thick steel píate of sufficient length and width must be
installed to protect the wiring method from screws and nails.
(4) Where exposed to corrosive conditions.
Figure 320-3B
• 300.4(A)(2) Notching Wood Members. If notching of wood

320.15 Exposed Work. Exposed Type AC cable must closely
framing members for cables is permitted by the building code,
follow the surface of the building finish or running boards. Type AC
a '/i6 in. thick steel píate of sufficient length and width must
cable installed on the bottom of floor or ceiling joists must be secured
be installed to protect the cables and raceways from screws
at every joist, and must not be subject to physical damage. Figure
and nails. Figure 320-3C
320-2
• 300.4(D) Cables Parallel to Framing Members and Furring
Strips. Cables installed parallel to framing members or furring
strips must be protected where likely to be penetrated by nails
A C Cable - E x p o s e d Work or screws. The wiring method must be installed so it's at Ieast
320.15
1 VA in. from the nearest edge of the framing members or fur-
ring strips, or a '/e in, thick steel píate must protect the wiring
method. Figure 320-4
A C Cable - T h r o u g h W o o d Framing Members

320.17
Bored Hole, [300.4(A)(i:

VA in. or More,
Type A C cable run o n t h e bottom of floor N o Steel Píate Required
or ceiling joists must be secured at every
joist and not subject to physical d a m a g e .
Bored Hole, [300.4(A)(1)]
Less T h a n 1 % in.
Steel Píate Required ¡
Coo*"gm2Cil *w*M*eHoncom
Notch (if permitted) |
[300.4(A)(2)]
Figure 320-2
Figure 320-3
320.17 Through or Parallel to Framing Members.

Type AC cable installed through, or parallel to, framing members or
furring strips must be protected against physical damage from pen-
etration by screws or nails by maintaining VA in. of separation, or by
installing a suitable metal píate in accordance with 300.4(A), (C), and
(D).
Armored Cable (Type AC) 320.30
A C Cable - Parallel t o Framing

T y p e A C Cable '•• Bending Radius
M e m b e r s a n d Furring Strips 320.24
320.17
X
Framing Inner Edge
X Member of Bend
Cable must be at Ieast VA in. from the

nearest edge of a framing m e m b e r or
furring strip, or be protected by a steel
píate or sieeve [300.4(D)]. Copyrtgtil 2011
www.MikeHoltxom Radius
2.50 in.
T h e Radius of the C u r v e
5 X 0.50 in. = 2.50 in.
Framing
Member
T h e radius of the inner edge of the curve must not
be less t h a n 5 times the diameter of the cable.
Figure 320-5
Figure 320-4 A C Cable - Securing

320.30(B)
320.23 In Accessible Attics or Roof Spaces.
(A) Cables Run Across the Top of Floor Joists. Where run across
Máximum
the top of floor joists, or across the face of rafters or studding within 4V2ft
7 ft of floor or floor joists, the cable must be protected by substantial
guard sthps that are at Ieast as high as the cable. If this space isn't
accessible by permanent stairs or ladders, protection is required only
within 6 ft of the nearest edge of the scuttie hole or attic entrance. I Copyright 2011
I www.MkeHolLcom
(B) Cable Installed Parallel to Framing Members. Where Type AC

cable is installed on the side of rafters, studs, ceiling joists, or floor
joists, no protection is required if the cable is installed and supported Type AC cable must be secured within
12 in. of termination and every 4 V2 ft.
so the nearest outside surface of the cable or raceway is at Ieast V/A
in. from the nearest edge of the framing member [300.4(0)]. Figure 320-6
320.24 Bends. Type AC cable must not be bent in a manner that

Author's Comment: Type AC cable is considered secured when
will damage the cable. This is accomplished by limiting bending of
installed horizontally through openings in wooden or metal fram-
the inner edge of the cable to a radius of not less than five times the ing members [320,30(C)].
diameter of the cable. Figure 320-5
(C) Supporting. Type AC cable must be supported at intervals not

320.30 Securing and Supporting. exceeding AV2 ft. Cables installed horizontally through wooden or
(A) General. Type AC cable must be supported and secured by Sta- metal framing members are considered supported if support doesn't
ples, cable ties, straps, hangers, or similar fittings, designed and exceed 4^2 ft. Figure 320-7
installed so as not to damage the cable.

(D) Unsupported Cables. Type AC cable can be unsupported where
(B) Securing. Type AC cable must be secured within 12 in. of every the cable is:
outlet box, junction box, cabinet, or fitting, and at intervals not exceed- (1) Fished through concealed spaces in finished buildings or struc-
ing 4V2 ft. Figure 320-6
tures, if support is impracticable; or

320.40 Armored Cable (Type AC)
A C Cable - Horizontal Support A C Cable - Fittings

320.30(C) 320.40 *
Listed A C
^ J2
Cable Fitting
A C cable run horizontally t h r o u g h VIOLATION

steel or w o o d framing m e m b e r s is Not Listed f o r
considered supported w h e r e s u c h A C Cable
support doesn't e x c e e d 4V2 ft.
A C cable must terminate in b o x e s or fittings specifically

listed to protect the conductors f r o m abrasión.
Copyrighl 2011, www KíikeMotl com
(2) Not more than 2 ft long at termináis where flexibility is necessary; An insulating anti-short bushing, sometimes called a "redhead," must
or be installed at all Type AC cable terminations. The termination fitting
must permit the visual inspection of the anti-short bushing once the
(3) Not more than 6 ft long from the last point of cable support to
cable has been installed. Figure 320-10
the point of connection to a luminaire or other piece of electrical
equipment within an accessible ceiling. Type AC cable fittings are
permitted as a means of cable support. Figure 320-8
A C Cable - B o x e s a n d Fittings
Anti-Short Bushing
A C Cable - Unsupported in Accessible Ceilings 320.40
320.30(D)(3)
Last Point of
A n insulating anti-short bushing must '
X X ^ X . ^ Cable Support p ^ ^ >
be installed at cable terminations.
1 /
Copynghl 2011, www.MikeHoll.coni
Unsupported A C cable in lengths not exceeding 6 ft is Figure 320-10

permitted w h e n installed within an accessible ceiling.
Figure 320-8
Author's Comments:
• The internal aluminum bonding strip within the cable serves

no electrical purpose once outside the cable, and can be cut
320.40 Boxes and Fittings. Type AC cable must termínate in
off, but many electricians use it to secure the anti-short bush-
boxes or fittings specifically listed for Type AC cable to protect the con-
ing to the cable. See 3 2 0 . 1 0 8 .
ductors from abrasión [300.15]. Figure 320-9
344 mke Holt's lllustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Armored Cable (Type AC) 320.108
Author's Comments:
• Conductors 4 AWG and larger that enter an enclosure must
be protected from abrasión during and after instaliation by • The best method of cutting Type AC cable is to use a tool spe-
a fitting that provides a smooth, rounded, insulating surface, cially designed for the purpose, such as a rotary armor cutter.
such as an insulating bushing unless the design of the box,
• When cutting Type AC cable with a hacksaw, be sure to cut
fitting, or enclosure provides equivalent protection in accor-
only one spiral of the cable and be careful not to nick the con-
dance with 300.4(6).
ductors; this is done by cutting the cable at an angle, Breaking
the cable spiral (bending the cable very sharply), then cutting
320.80 Conductor Ampacity. the cable with a pair of dikes isn't a good practice.
(A) Thermai Insulation. Conductor ampacity is calculated on the

90°C insulation rating of the conductors, however the conductors 320.108 Equipment Grounding Conductor. Type AC
must be sized to the termination temperature rating in accordance cable must provide an adequate path for fault current as required by
with 110.14(C)(1). Figure 320-11 250.4(A)(5) or 250.4(B)(4) to act as an equipment grounding conduc-
tor. Figure 320-12
T y p e A C Cable
Ampacity in Thermai Insulation
320.80(A) A C Cable - Equipment G r o u n d i n g Conductor
320.108
T y p e A C cable provides a n adequate path for

fault current t o act a s a n equipment grounding
\
conductor in a c c o r d a n c e with 250.118(8).
Conductor ampacity is calculated on the

90°C insulation rating of the conductors,
however the conductors must be sized
to the termination temperature rating in
accordance with 110.14(C)(1).
T h e bonding strip can be cut off at the termination

Copynghl 2011 www UikeHon com or it can be u s e d to secure the anti-short bushing.
Copyiiflhl 2011. wwwMlMl teHoom

Figure 320-11
Figure 320-12
Question: What's the ampacity of four 12 THHN current-carrying

Author's Comment: The internal aluminum bonding strip isn't
conductors installed in TypeAC cable?
an equipment grounding conductor, but it allows the interlocked
(a) 18A (b)24A (c) 27A (d) 30A armor to serve as an equipment grounding conductor because
it reduces the impedance of the armored spirals to ensure that
Answer: 24A a ground fault will be cleared. It's the combination of the alu-
Table 31015(B)(16) ampacity if 12 THHN is 30A minum bonding strip and the cable armor that creates the
Conductor Adjusted Ampacity = 30A x 0.80 [Table 31015(B)(3)(a)] equipment grounding conductor. Once the bonding strip exits the
Conductor Adjusted Ampacity = 24A cable, it can be cut off because it no longer serves any purpose.
The effective ground-fault current path must be maintained by
the use of fittings specifically listed for Type AC cable [320.40].
See 300.12, 300.15, and 300.100.
PART III. CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
320.100 Construction. Type AC cable has an armar of flexible
metal tape with an internal aluminum bonding strip in intímate con-
tact with the armor for its entire length.
Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHott.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633)

ARTICLE
330 Metal-Ciad Cable (Type MC)

INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 330—METAL-CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC)
Metal-dad cable endoses insulated conductors in a metal sheath of either corrugated or smooth copper or aluminum tubing, or spiral inter-
locked steel or aluminum. The physical characteristics of Type MC cable make it a versatile wiring method that you can use in almost any
location, and for almost any application. The most commonly used Type MC cable is the interlocking kind, which looks similar to armored
cable or flexible metal conduit. Traditional interlocked Type MC cable isn't permitted to serve as an equipment grounding conductor, there-
fore this cable must contain an insulated equipment grounding conductor in accordance with 250.118(1). There is a fairly new produd
called interlocked Type MC^ cable containing an aluminum grounding/bonding conductor running just below the metal armor, which allows
the sheath to serve as an equipment grounding conductor [250.118(10)(b)].
PART I. GENERAL Author's Comment: Because the outer sheath of interlocked

Type MC cable isn't listed as an equipment grounding conductor,
330.1 Scope. Article 330 covers the use, instaliation, and con- it contains an equipment grounding conductor [330.108].
struction specifications of metal-dad cable.
330.2 Definition.
Metal-Ciad Cable (Type MC). A factory assembiy of insulated cir- PART II. INSTALLATION
cuit conductors, with or without optical fiber members, enclosed in
330.10 Uses Permitted.
an armor of interlocking metal tape or a smooth or corrugated metal-
lic sheath. Figure 330-1 (A) General Uses.
(1) In branch circuits, feeders, and services
Metal-Ciad Cable (Type M C Cable) (2) In power, lighting, control, and signal circuits
330.2 Definition
(3) Indoors or outdoors
(4) Exposed or concealed

Type M C
(5) Directly buried (if identified for the purpose)
Interlocking Metal Sheath
(6) In a cable tray
(7) In a raceway
(8) As aerial cable on a messenger

Copyngtit 2011. www Uik.HoH.coni
(9) In hazardous locations as permitted in 501.10(B), 502.10(8), and

A factory assembiy of o n e or more insulated circuit
conductors enclosed in a n armor of interlocking metal 503.10
tape, or a smooth or corrugated metallic sheath.
(10) Embedded in plaster or brick
Figure 330-1 (11) In wet locations, if any of the following are met:
I-Clad Cable (Type MC) 330.17
a. The metallic covering is impervious to moisture. 330.17 Through or Parallel to Framing Members.
Type MC cable installed through or parallel to framing members or
b. A moisture-impervious jacket is provided under the metal
furring strips must be protected against physical damage from pen-
covering.
etration of screws or nails by maintaining a VA in. separation, or by
c. The insulated conductors under the metallic covering are installing a suitable metal píate in accordance with 300.4(A) and (D).
listed for use in wet locations and a corrosion-resistant
jacket is provided over the metallic sheath. Author's Comments:
(12' If single-conductor cables are used, all circuit conductors must • 300.4(A)(1) Drilling Holes in Wood Members. When drilling
be grouped together to minimize induced voltage on the sheath holes through wood framing members for cables, the edge of
[300.3(B)]. the holes must be not less than VA in. from the edge of the
wood member Figure 330-2A
(B) Specific Uses. If the edge of the hole is less than VA in. from the edge, a
VÍ6 in. thick steel píate of sufficient length and width must be
(1) Cable Tray. Type MC cable installed in a cable tray must comply
installed to protect the wiring method from screws and nails.
with 392.10, 392.12, 392.10(E). 392.10(L), 392.10(N), 392.30ÍA),
Figure 330-2B
392.46, and 392.56.
• 300.4(A)(2) Notching Wood Members. If notching of wood
(2) Direct Buried. Direct-buried cables must be protected in accor- framing members for cables is permitted by the building code,
with 300.5. a '/e in. thick steel píate of sufficient length and width must
be installed to protect the cables and raceways from screws
(3) Installed as Service-Entrance Cable. Type MC cable is permit-
and nails. Figure 330-2C
ted for service entráñeos, when installed in accordance with 230.43.
• 300.4(D) Cables Parallel to Framing Members and Furring
(4) Installed Outside of Buildings or Structures. Type MC cable Strips. Cables installed parallel to framing members or furring
installed outside oí buildings or structures must comply with 225.10, strips must be protected where likely to be penetrated by nails
396.10, and 396.12. or screws. The wiring method must be installed so it's at Ieast
11/4 in. from the nearest edge of the framing member or fur-
Note: The "Uses Permitted" isn't an all-inclusive list, which indicates ring strips, or a '/e in. thick steel píate must protect it. Figure
that other suitable uses are permitted if approved by the authority
330-3
having jurisdiction.
330.12 Uses Not Permitted. Type MC cable must not be used

where: M C Cable - T h r o u g h Framing
(1) Subject to physical damage.
(2) Exposed to the destructive corrosive conditions in (a) or (b), unless Bored Hole, [300.4(A)(1)]
the metallic sheath or armor is resistant or protected by material VÁ in. or M o r e ,
resistant to the conditions:
(a) Direct burial in the earth or embedded in concrete unless identi- ^.r^-*^, I B o r e d Hole. r300.4(A)í1)]
fied for the application. ^ Less T h a n 1 Vi i n .
(b) Exposed to cinder filis, strong chiorides, caustic alkalis, or vapors
of chiorine or of hydrochioric acids.
Notch (if permitted)
[300.4(A){2)]
Copyright 2011. www.MlktHoa com
Figure 330-2

330.23 Metal-Ciad Cable (Type MC)
MC Cable Parallel to Framing M e m b e r s and Furring Strips

(A) Smooth-Sheath Cables.
330.17
(1) Smooth-Sheath Type MC cables must not be bent so the bend-
-_¿ Framing
ing radius of the inner edge of the cable is less than 10 times the
; Member,
external diameter of the metallic sheath for cable up to % in. in
i Cable must be at Ieast VA in. from t h e external diameter.
¡ nearest edge of a framing m e m b e r or
furring strip, or be protected by a steel (B) Interlocked or Corrugated Sheath. Interiocked- or corrugated-
píate or sieeve [300.4(D)]. sheath Type MC cable must not be bent so the bending radius of the
inner edge of the cable is less than seven times the external diameter
of the cable. Figure 330-4
Framing
Member
Interiocked or Corrugated-Sheath Type M C Cable

Bending Radius
330.24(B)
Inner E d g e
of Bend
Figure 330-3
0.50 in.
O.D.
330.23 In Accessible Attics or Roof Spaces. lype MC
cable installed in accessible attics or roof spaces must comply with Radius
320.23. 3.50 in.
T h e Radius of the Curve
Author's Comments: 7 X 0.50 in. = 3.50 in.
• On the Surface of Floor Joists, Rafters, or Studs. In attics and T h e radius of the inner edge o f the curve must not
be less than 7 times t h e diameter of the cable.
roof spaces that are accessible, substantial guards must pro-
tect cables installed across the top of floor joists, or across
Figure 330-4
the face of rafters or studding within 7 ft of floor or floor joists.
If this space isn't accessible by permanent stairs or ladders,
protection is required only within 6 ft of the nearest edge of
the scuttie hole or attic entrance [320.23(A)].
(A) General. Type MC cable must be supported and secured by Sta-
• Along the Side of Framing Members [320,23(B)]. When Type
MC cable is installed on the side of rafters, studs, or floor ples, cable ties, straps, hangers, or similar fittings designed and
joists, no protection is required if the cable is installed and installed so as not to damage the cable.
supported so the nearest outside surface of the cable or
(B) Securing. Type MC cable with four or less conductors sized no
raceway is at Ieast V/A in. from the nearest edge of the fram-
larger than 10 AWG, must be secured within 12 in. of every outlet box,
ing member where nails or screws are likely to penétrate
junction box, cabinet, or fitting and at intervals not exceeding 6 ft.
[300.4(0)].
Figure 330-5
(C) Supporting. Type MC cable must be supported at intervals not

330.24 Bends. Bends must be made so that the cable won't be
exceeding 6 ft. Cables installed horizontally through wooden or metal
damaged, and the radius of the curve of any bend at the inner edge of
framing members are considered secured and supported if such sup-
the cable must not be less than what's dictated in each of the follow-
port doesn't exceed 6 ft intervals. Figure 330-6
ing instances:
(D) Unsupported Cables. Type MC cable can be unsupported if the
cable is:
Mike HolVs lllustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
330.80 Metal-ciad Cable (Type MC)
330.80 Conductor Ampacities. Conductor ampacity is cal- M C Cable - Equipment Grounding Conductor
culated on the 90°C insulation rating of the conductors; however, the
conductors must be sized to the termination temperature rating in
accordance with 110.14{C)(1).
PART III. CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

330.108 Equipment Grounding Conductor, if Type
: Traditional interlocked T y p e M C cable isn't
MC cable is to serve as an equipment grounding conductor, it must
permitted to serve a s a n equipment grounding i
comply with 250.118 and 250.122. ; conductor, therefore this cable must contain an
• equipment g r o u n d i n g conductor in accordance
Author's Comment: The outer sheath of: I with 250.118(1).
• Traditional interlocked Type MC cable isn't permitted to serve

Figure 330-9
as an equipment grounding conductor, therefore this cable
must contain an insulated equipment grounding conductor in
accordance with 250.118(1). Figure 330-9
M C Cable
• Interlocked Type MC^ cable containing an aluminum ground-
E q u i p m e n t G r o u n d i n g Conductor
ing/bonding conductor running just below the metal armor 330.108
is listed to serve as an equipment grounding conductor
[250.118(10)(b)]. Figure 330-10
• Smooth or corrugated-tube Type MC cable is listed to serve

as an equipment grounding conductor [250.118(10)(c)].
Interlocked Type M C ^ p ® cable containing an aluminum |

grounding/bonding conductor running just below the i
metal armor is listed to serve a s a n equipment
g r o u n d i n g conductor [250.118(10)(b)].
Copynghl 20)1. w w w . M ¡ k e H o « - c o m
Figure 330-10
Mike HaiVs liiustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume
ARTICLE
Nonmetallic-Sheathed
334 Cable (Types NM and NMC)
INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 334—NONMETALLIC-SHEATHED CABLE (TYPES NM AND NMC)
Nonmetallic-Sheathed cable is flexible, inexpensive, and easily installed. It provides very limited physical protection for the conductors, so
the instaliation restrictions are strict. Its low cost and relativa ease of instaliation make it a common wiring method for residential and com-
mercial branch circuits. In the field, Type NM cable is typically referred to as "Romex®."
PART I. GENERAL Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable

(Types N M and N M C Cable)
334.1 Scope. Article 334 covers the use, instaliation, and con- 334.2 Definition
struction specifications of nonmetallic-sheathed cable.
334.2 Definition.
Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable (Types NM and NMC). A wiring method ^m^NlG NM-B 600V
that endoses hwo or more insulated conductors, 14 AWG through 2
AWG, within a nonmetallic jacket.
• NM cable has insulated conductors enclosed within an A wiring m e t h o d that e n d o s e s two, three, or four
overall nonmetallic jacket. insulated conductors (14 A W G to 2 A W G ) within a n
outer nonmetallic jacket.
• NMC cable has insulated conductors enclosed within an
overall, corrosión resistant, nonmetallic jacket. Figure Copyngm 2011. www IMieHon com
334-1
Figure 334-1
Author's Comment: It's the generally accepted practice in the

electrical industry to cali Type NM cable "Romex®," a registered
trademark of the Southwire Ck)mpany.
334.6 Listed. Types NM and NMC cables must be listed.
Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MlkeHolt.coni • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 351

334.10 Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable (Types NM and NMC)
PART II. INSTALLATION (2) Multifamily dweilings permitted to be of Types III, IV, and V con-
struction. Figure 334-4 _
334,10 Uses Permitted. Type N M and Type N M C cables can
be used in the following:
(1) One- and two-family dweilings of any height, and their attached/
detached garages or storage buildings. Figures 334-2 and
334^3
N M Cable - O n e - and Two-Family Dweiling Units

Section 334.10(1)
N M cable can be installed in multifamily

buildings of Type III, IV, a n d V construction.
Figure 334-4
(3) Other structures permitted to be of Types III, IV, and V construc-

tion, except as prohibited in 334.12. Cables must be concealed
within walls, floors, or ceilings that provide a thermai barrier of
material with at Ieast a 15-minute finish rating, as identified in
Figure 334-2 listings of fire-rated assemblies. Figure 334-5
N M Cable - O n e - and Two-Family Dweiling Units N M Cable - Other Structures

334.10(1) 334.10(3)
El ¡LMÍ
I
In other than dweiling units, N M cable can be installed in

NM cable can be installed in one- and two-family dweiling Type III, IV, and V construction structures, provided the
units and their attached/detached garage or storage buildings. cables are c o n c e a l e d within a 15-minute finish rating.
Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable (Types NM and NMC) 334.15
Author's Comment: See the definition of "Concealed" in Article (6) In motion picture studios.
100.
(7) In storage battery rooms.
Note 1: Building constructions are defined in NFPA 220-2006,
(8) In hoistways, or on elevators or escalators.
Standard on Types of Building Construction the applicable building
code,or both. (9) Embedded in poured cement, concrete, or aggregate.
Note 2: See Annex E for the determination of building types [NFPA (10) In any hazardous location, except where permitted by 501.10(6)
220, Table 3-1]. (3). 502.10(B)(3), and 504.20.
334.12 Uses Not Permitted. (B) Type NM. Type NM cables must not be used under the following
conditions, or in the following locations:
(A) Types NM and NMC.
(1) If exposed to corrosive fumes or vapors.
(1) In any dweiling or structure not specifically permitted in
334.10(1), (2), and (3). (2) If embedded in masonry, concrete, adobe, fill, or plaster
(2) Exposed in dropped or suspended ceilings in other than one- and (3) In a shallow chase in masonry, concrete, or adobe and covered
two-family and multifamily dweilings. Figure 334-6 with plaster, adobe, or similar finish.
(4) In wet or damp locations. Figure 334-7
N M Cable - S u s p e n d e d Ceilings
334.12(A)(2) N M Cable - Wet Location
334.12(B)(4) Exposed to
Weather
Direct-Buried ^
Cable or R a c e w a y
Concrete in direct
contact with earth.
In other than a dweiling unit,
VIOLATION
N M cable isn't permitted to
be run e x p o s e d within a
s u s p e n d e d ceiling.
VIOLATION
Type N M cable isn't suitable for
H
use in wet or d a m p locations.
Figure 334-7
Figure 3 3 4 ^ Author's Comment: Type NM cable isn't permitted in ducts

or cavity plenum spaces [300.22], or for wiring in patient care
áreas [517.13].
(3) As service-entrance cable.
(4) In commercial garages having hazardous locations, as defined in 334.15 Exposed.

511.3.
(A) Surface of the Building. Exposed Type NM cable must closely
(5) In theaters and similar locations, except where permitted in follow the surface of the building.
518.4(B).

(B) Protected from Physical Damage. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable Type NM cable installed on a wall of an unfinished basement or crawl
must be protected from physical damage by rigid metal conduit, inter- space subject to physical damage must be protected in accordance
medíate metal conduit, Schedule 80 PVC conduit, Type RTRC-XW con- with 300.4, or be installed in a raceway with a nonmetallic bushing
duit, electrical metallic tubing, guard strips, or other means approved or adaptar at the point where the cable enters the raceway, and the
by the authority having jurisdiction. NM cable must be secured within 12 in. of the point where the cable
enters the raceway. Figure 334-9
Author's Comment: When installed in a raceway, the cable
must be protected from abrasión by a fitting installed on the end
of the raceway [300.15(C)]. N M Cable Run on Walls
Unfinished B a s e m e n t
334.15(0)
Type NMC cable installed in shallow chases in masonry, concrete, or
adobe, must be protected against nails or screws by a steel píate not
Secure the cable within
less than Vie in. thick [300.4{F)] and covered with plaster, adobe, or 12 in. o f t h e raceway.
similar finish.
Type NM cable must be protected in accordance
with 300.4 or installed in a raceway that has a non-
Author's Comment: If Type NM cable is installed in a metal metallic bushing or adaptor where the cable enters.
raceway, the raceway isn't required to be connected to an
equipment grounding conductor [250.86 Ex 2 and 300.12 Ex]. The cable sheath must extend
into the box at Ieast % in.
(C) In Unfinished Basements and Crawl Spaces. If Type NM cable

is installed at angles with joists in unfinished basements and crawl * ^ '^^^ metal box must be
spaces, it's permissible to secure cables containing conductors not • connected to the EGC.
smaller than two 6 AWG or three 8 AWG conductors directly to the
lower edges of the joists. Smaller cables must be installed through Figure 334-9
bored holes in joists or on running boards. Figure 334-8
334.17 Through or Parallel to Framing Members.

N M Cable Run o n Joist
Unfinished Basements and Crawl Spaces Type N M cable installed through or parallel to framing members or
334.15(0) furring strips must be protected against physical damage from pen-
etration by screws or nails by VA in. of separation or by a suitable
metal píate [300.4(A) and (0)]. Figures 334^10 and 334-11
If Type N M cable passes through holes in metal studs, a listed bush-

ing or listed grommet is required [300.4(B)(1)] to be in place befare
the cable is installed. Figure 334-12
334.23 Attics and Roof Spaces. Type N M cable installed In

accessible attics or roof spaces must comply with 320.23.
NM cables sizes 6/2, 8/3, or larger
can be mounted directly to the bottom
of the joist without protection. Author's Comments:
I1 I • On the Surface of Floor Joists, Rafters, or Studs. In attics and

Smaller cables must be run through bored holes roof spaces that are accessible, substantial guards must pro-
or they can be mounted to running boards. tect cables installed across the top of floor joists, or across
the face of rafters or studding within 7 ft of the floor or floor
joists. If this space isn't accessible by permanent stairs or lad-
ders, protection is required only within 6 ft of the nearest edge
of the scuttie hole or attic entrance [320.23(A)].
Figure 334-8
Nonmetallíc-Sheathed Cable (Types NM and NMC) 334.30
N M Cables T h r o u g h W o o d M e m b e r s N M Cable - T h r o u g h Metal Framing

334.17 334.17
VA
VA B o r e d Hole, [300.4(A)(1)]
VA in. or More,
B o r e d Hole, [300.4(A)(1)]
Less T h a n VA in. j ,
Steel Píate R e q u i r e d '
Notch {if permitted)

[300.4(A)(2)] W h e r e N M cable passes through holes in metal
Steel Píate R e q u i r e d studs, a listed bushing or listed g r o m m e t must be
in place before t h e cable is installed.
Copynghl M i l . w«w MikeHoll com
NM cable must be protected against physical Figure 334-12

damage from penetration by screws or nails by
VA in. of separation, o r by a suitable metal píate.
334.24 Bends. When the cable is bent, it must not be damaged
Figure 334-10 and the radius of the curve of the inner edge of any bend must not be
less than five times the diameter of the cable. Figure 334-13
NM Cables Parallel to Framing M e m b e r s Framing

334.17 [300.4(D)] Member N M Cable - Bending Radius
A Sharp bend Con-ect 334.24
is a c o m m o n Bending
VIOLATION. Radius
Begin
- Cable must be at Ieast VA in. from t h e

"I nearest edge of a framing m e m b e r or
be protected by a steel píate or sieeve.
I I I
• Steel Píate for N o t c h e s | Radius
in W o o d [300.4(A)(2)] 2.50 in.
11 I ' 1 T h e Radius of the Curve
5 X 0.50 in. = 2.50 in.
Copyrtghl 2011. www Mlk.HoH com
T h e radius of the inner edge of the curve must not

be less than 5 times the diameter of the cable.
Figure 334-13
Figure 334-11
334,30 Securing and Supporting. staples, straps, cable

Along the Side of Framing Members [320.23(6]]. When Type
ties, hangers, or similar fittings must secure Type NM cable in a
NM cable is installed on the side of rafters, studs, or floor
manner that won't damage the cable. Type NM cable must be secured
joists, no protection is required if the cable is installed and
within 12 in. of every box, cabinet, enclosure, or termination fitting,
supported so the nearest outside surface of the cable or race-
except as permitted by 314.17(C) Ex or 312.5(0) Ex, and at intervals
way is at Ieast V/A in. from the nearest edge of the framing
not exceeding AVA ft.
member if nails or screws are likely to penétrate [300.4(D)].
Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MlkeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 355

Two-wire (fíat) Type NM cable isn't permitted to be stapled on edge. N M Cable - Securing a n d Supporting
334.30
Figure 334-14
N M Cable - Support Type N M cable must be secured

334.30 a n d supported within 12 in. of
termination or fitting a n d at intervals
Cable ties can be used
not e x c e e d i n g 4 1/2 ft.
to secure N M cables.
T w o cables are permitted t o
be s e c u r e d by o n e staple.
Type N M cable installed in a
raceway isn't required to be
VIOLATION secured within the raceway.
N M cables must not
be stapled o n e d g e .
CopyiigM 2011. www.Mikahlaa.com
Type N M cable must be secured within 12 i n . of

tennination a n d at intervals not e x c e e d i n g 4V2 ft. Figure 334-15
Figure 334-14
N M Cable - Horizontal Support

334.30(A)
Type NM cable installed in a raceway isn't required to be secured
within the raceway. Figure 334-15
(A) Horizontal Runs. Type NM cable installed horizontally in bored Max.

or punched holes in wood or metal framing members, or notches in Vú 4V2ft
Between
wooden members is considered secured and supported, but the cable
Framing
must be secured within 1 ft of termination. Figure 334-16 Members
Note: See 314.17(C) for support where nonmetallic boxes are used.
(B) Unsupported. Type NM cable can be unsupported in the follow-

ing situations: N M cable run horizontally through framing m e m b e r s is
considered supported if s e c u r e d within 1 ft of termination.
(1) If Type NM cable is fished between concealed access points in
finished buildings or structures, and support is impracticable. Figure 334-16
(2) Not more than AV? ft of unsupported cable is permitted from the
last point of support within an accessible ceiling for the connec- 334.80 Conductor Ampacity. Conductor ampacity is caicu
tion of luminaires or equipment. lated on the 90°C insulation rating of the conductor in accordance
with Table 310.15(B)(16), however the conductors must be sized to
Author's Comment: Type NM cable isn't permitted as a the termination temperature rating of 60°C.
wiring method above accessible ceilings, except in dweilings
[334.12(A){2)].
Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable (Types NM and NMC) 334.80
Question: Wtiat size Type NM cable is required to supply a 9.60 If múltiple Type NM cables pass through the same wood framing
'i^K 240V, single-phase fixed space heater with a 3A blower opening that's to be sealed with thermai insulation, caulking, or
wtof? The termináis are rated 75%. Figure 334-17 sealing foam, the allowable ampacity of each conductor must be
adjusted in accordance with Table 310.15(B)(3)(a). Figure 334-18
(aj2AWG (b)4AWG (c)6AWG (d)8AWG
Answer: (b) 4 AWG

N M Cable - Conductor A m p a c i t y
Step 1: Determine the total load in amperes: 334.80
l = VA/E
I = 9mW/240V-h 3A W h e r e N M cables pass through t h e s a m e
l = 40A-h3A w o o d framing opening to be sealed with
l = 43A caulk or sealing f o a m , the ampacity of each
conductor must be adjusted in accordance
Step 2: Conductor and Protection Size [424.3(8)]. Size the with Table 310.15(B)(3){a) based o n the
90°C ampacity c o l u m n of Table 310.15(B)(16).
ungrounded conductors and overcurrent device at no
less than 125 percent of the total heating load.
Conductor/Protection Size = Loadx 1.25

Conductor/Protection Size = 43A x 1.25
Conductor/Protection Size = 53.75A
According to Table 310.15(B)(16), a 6AWG conductor

rated 55A at 60% protected with a 60A overcurrent
device [240.6(A)].
Figure 334-18
NM Cable - Conductor Ampacity
334.80
9.6kW Heat
Author's Comment: This requirement has no effect on conduc-
3AFan
tor sizing if you bundie no more than nine current-carrying 14
(40A + 3A) = 4 3 A or 12 AWG conductors together. For example, three 14/2 cables
4 3 A x 1.25 = 53.75A
6 A W G Rated 5 5 A and one 14/3 cable (nine current-carrying 1 4 THHN conductors)
at 60°C are bundied together in a dry location, the ampacity for each
conductor (25A at 90°C, Table 310.15(B)(16)) is adjusted by a
Copyright 70 percent adjustment factor [Table 310.15(B)(3)(a)].
Adjusted Conductor Ampacity = 25A x 0.70

Conductors are sized to the 60°C
column rating of Table 31Q.15fB)(16) Adjusted Conductor Ampacity ^ 17.50A
Figure 334-17

PART III. CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 334.108 Equipment Grounding Conductor. Type NM

cable must have an insulated, covered, or bare equipment ground-
334.100 Construction. The outer cable sheath of Type N M
ing conductor.
cable must be constructed with nonmetallic material.
334.112 Insulation. N M conductor insulation must be rated

334.104 Conductors. The conductors must be 14 AWG through
90°Ct194°F).
2 AWG copper, or 12 AWG through 2 AWG aluminum or copper-clad
aluminum. Note: Types NM cable identified by the markings NM-B meet this
requirement.
ARTICLE
Service-Entrance Cable
338 (Types SE and USE)
INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 338—SERVICE-ENTRANCE CABLE (TYPES SE AND USE)
Sen/ice-entrance cable is a single conductor or muíticonductor assembiy with or without an overall moisture-resistant covering. This cable
is used primarily for services not over GOOV, but can aiso be used for feeders and branch circuits when the limitations of this article are
observed.
PART L GENERAL Type SE. SE and SER cables have a flame-retardant, moisture-resis-
tant covering and are permitted only in aboveground installations.
338.1 Scope. Article 338 covers the use, instaliation, and con-
These cables are permitted for branch circuits or feeders when
struction specifications of service-entrance cable, Types SE and USE.
installed in accordance with 338.10(8).
338.2 Definitions.
Author's Comment: SER cable is SE cable with an insulated
Service-Entrance Cable. Service-entrance cable is a single or muíti- neutral, resulting in three insulated conductors with an uninsu-
conductor assembiy, with or without an overall covering, used primar- lated equipment grounding conductor. SER cable is round, while
ily for services not over eoov. Figure 338-1 2-wire SE cable is fíat.
Type USE. USE cable is identified as a wiring method permitted for
Service-Entrance Cable underground use; its covering is moisture resistant, but not fíame
338.2 Definition retardan!.
A single or muíticonductor assembiy with o r
without an overall covering used primarily for
Author's Comment: USE cable isn't permitted to be installed
services not over 600V.
indoors [338.10(B)], except single-conductor USE dual rated as
Aboveground RHH/RHW.
SE cable is permitted only in a b o v e g r o u n d installations

and is permitted for branch circuits or feeders w h e n PART II. INSTALLATION
installed according to 338.10ÍB).
Underground Only
(A) Service-Entrance Conductors. Service-entrance cable used as
service-entrance conductors must be installed in accordance with
Article 230.
USE cable is identified for underground use. Its covering
is moisture resistant but not fíame retardant, and it isn't (B) Branch CircuJts or Feeders.
suitable for use within a premises.
(1) Insulated Conductor. Type SE service-entrance cable is permit-
Figure 338-1 ted for branch circuits and feeders where the circuit conductors are
insulated.
Milce Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 359

338.12 Service-Entrance Cable (Types SE and USE)
(2) Uninsulated Conductor. SE cable is permitted for branch circuits The máximum conductor temperature rating can be used [310.15(6)
and feeders if the insulated conductors are used for circuit wiring, (2)] for ampacity adjustment and correction purposes, but when
and the uninsulated conductor is only used for equipment grounding installed in thermai insulation the conductors must be sized in
purposes. Figure 338-2 accordance with Table 310.15(B)(16) 60°C rated conductor column.
CAUTION: Underground service-entrance cable

(USE) is not permitted for interior wiring because it
g S E Cable - Use of Urînsulated Conductor
does not have a flame-retardant insulation. It would
only be permitted in interior wiring when dual listed as wire
type in accordance with Table 310.104, such as RHW.
(b) Exterior Installations. The cable must be supported in accor-

dance with 334.30 and where run underground the cable must
comply with Part II of Article 340.
338.12 Uses Not Permitted.
(A) Service-Entrance Cable. SE cable isn't permitted under the fol-

SE and SER cable can be used for branch circuits lowing conditions or locations:
and feeders, but the uninsulated conductor can only
be used for equipment grounding. (1) If subject to physical damage unless protected in accordance with
Copyngh'. 2011. «wwMiiieHod com
230.50(A).
Figure 338-2
(2) Underground with or without a raceway.
(B) Underground Service-Entrance Cable. USE cable isn't permitted:

Ex: In existing Installations, uninsulated conductors may be used for
the neutral conductor if the uninsulated neutral conductor of the cable (1) For interior wiring.
originates in service equipment.
(2) Above ground, except where protected against physical damage
(3) Temperature Limitations. SE cable must not be subjected to in accordance with 300.5(0).
conductor temperatures exceeding its insulation rating.
338.24 Bends. Bends in cable must be made so the protective
(4) Instaliation Methods for Branch Circuits and Feeders. SE cable
coverings of the cable aren't damaged, and the radius of the curve of
used for branch circuits or feeders must comply with (a) and (b).
the inner edge is at Ieast five times the diameter of the cable.
(a) Interior Installations. SE cable used for interior branch circuit or
feeder wiring must be installed in accordance with the same require-
ments as Type NM Cable—Article 334, excludinq 334.80.
ARTICLE
Underground Feeder
and Branch-Circuit
340 Cable (Type UF)
INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 340--UNDERGR0UND FEEDER AND BRANCH-CIRCUIT CABLE
(TYPE UF)
UF cable is a moisture-, fungus-, and corrosion-resistant cable suitable for direct burial in the earth.
PART I. GENERAL Author's Comments:
• UF cable is a moisture-, fungus-, and corrosion-resistant

cable suitable for direct burial in the earth. It comes in sizes
struction specifications of underground feeder and branch-circuit
1 4 AWG through 4 / 0 AWG [340.104]. The covering of muíti-
cable, Type UF
conductor Type UF cable is molded plástic that encases the
insulated conductors.
340.2 Definition.
• Because the covering of Type UF cable encapsulates the insu-
Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cable (Type UF). A factory lated conductors, it's difficult to strip off the outer jacket to
assembiy of insulated conductors with an integral or an overall cov- gain access to the conductors, but this covering provides
ering of nonmetallic material suitable for direct burial in the earth. excellent corrosión protection. Be careful not to damage the
Notice that Type UF is not allowed as a service cable. Figure 340-1 conductor insulation or cut yourself when you remove the
outer cover.
Underground Feeder a n d Branch-Circuit C a b l e

340.6 Listing Requirements. Type UF cable must be lísted.
Type U F Cable
340.2. Definition

(1) Underground, in accordance with 300.5.
(2) As a single conductor in the same trench or raceway with circuit

conductors.
A factory assembiy of insulated conductors with an
integral or a n overall covering of nonmetallic material (3) As interior or exterior wiring in wet, dry, or corrosive locations.
suitable for direct burial in t h e earth.
(4) As Type NM cable, when installed in accordance with Article 334.
Copyright 2011. >«ww.Mik«Hon com
(5) For solar photovoltaic systems, in accordance with 690.31.

Figure 340-1
(6) As single-conductor cables for nonheating leads for heating
cables, as provided in 424.43.
(7) Supported by cable trays.

Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuít Cable (Type UF)
340.12 Uses Not Permitted. Author's Comment: UF cable isn't permitted in ducts or cavity
plenum spaces [300.22], or in patient care áreas [517.13].
(1) As services [230.43].
(2) In commercial garages [511.3].

340i24 Bends. Bends in cables must be made so that the pro-
(3) In theaters [520.5]. tective coverings of the cable aren't damaged, and the radius of the
curve of the inner edge must not be less than five times the diame-
(4) In motion picture studios [530.11],
ter of the cable.
(5) In storage battery rooms [Article 480].
340.80 Ampacity. The ampacity of conductors contained in UF
(6) In hoistways [Article 620].
cable is based on the 60°C insulation rating listed in Table 310.15(B)
(7) In hazardous locations, except as specifically permitted by other (16).
articles in the Code.
340.112 insulation. The conductors of UF cable must be one
(8) Embedded in concrete.
of the moisture-resistant types listed in Table 310.104(A) suitable for
(9) Exposed to direct sunlight unless identified. branch-circuit wihng. If installed as a substitute wiring method for
Type NM cable, the conductor insulation must be rated 90°C (194°F).
(10) If subject to physical damage. Figure 340-2
(11) As overhead messenger-supported wiring.
UF Cable - Physical Protection

340.12(10)
UF Cable can't be used w h e r e

subject to physical d a m a g e .
Figure 3 4 0 - 2
ARTICLE
ntermediate Metal
342 Conduit (Type IMC)
INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 342—INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (TYPE IMC)
Intermedíate metal conduit (IMC) is a circular metal raceway with an outside diameter equal to that oí rigid metal conduit. The wall thick-
ness of intermedíate metal conduit is less than that of rigid metal conduit (RMC), so it's a greater interior cross-sectional área for containing
conductors. Intermedíate metal conduit is lighter and less expensive than rigid metal conduit, but it can be used in all of the same loca-
tions as rigid metal conduit. Intermedíate metal conduit aiso uses a different steel alloy that makes it stronger than rigid metal conduit, even
though the walls are thinner. Intermedíate metal conduit is manufactured in both galvanized steel and aluminum; the steel type is much
more common.
PART I. GENERAL Author's Comment: The type of steel from which intermedíate
metal conduit is manufactured, the process by which it's made,
342.1 Scope, Article 342 covers the use, instaliation, and con- and the corrosión protection applied are all equal, or superior, to
struction specifications of intermedíate metal conduit and associated that of rigid metal conduit.
fittings.
342.6 Listing Requirements. intermedíate metal conduit and

342.2 Definition,
its associated fittings, such as elbows and couplings, must be listed.
Intermedíate Metal Conduit (Type IMC). A listed steel raceway of cir-
cular cross section that can be threaded with integral or associated
couplings. It's listed for the instaliation of electrical conductors, and is
used with listed fittings to provide electrical continuity. Figure 342-1 PART II. INSTALLATION
(A) All Atmospheric Conditions and Occupancies. Intermedíate

Intermedíate Metal Conduit (Type IMC)
metal conduit ís permitted in all atmospheric conditions and
342.2 Definition
occupancies.
(B) Corrosión Environments. Intermedíate metal conduit, elbows,

couplings, and fittings can be installed ín concrete, in direct contact
with the earth, or ín áreas subject to severe corrosivo influences if
A listed steel circular raceway that can be provided with corrosión protection and judged suitable for the condi-
threaded with integral or associated couplings.
tion in accordance with 300.6.
Compression Set S c r e w (C) Cinder Fill. IMC can be installed ín or under cinder fill subject
to permanent moisture when protected on all sides by 2 ín. of non-
cínder concrete; where the conduit isn't less than 18 ín. under the
\ : \ _,.„^ti fill; or where protected by corrosión protection judged suitable for the
Threadless IMC Fittings condition.
CopyngM 2011. www UikeHoll con)
Figure 342-1
mkB Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 363

342.14 Intermedíate Metal Conduit (Type IMC)
(D) Wet Locations. Support fittings, such as screws, straps, and so Author's Comment: See 300.17 for additional examples on
forth, installed in a wet location must be made of corrosion-resistant how to size raceways when conductors aren't all the same size.
material, or be protected by corrosion-resistant coatings in accor-

Cables can be installed in intermedíate metal conduit, as long as the
dance with 300.6.
number of cables doesn't exceed the allowable percentage fill speci-
CAUTION: Supplementary coatings for corrosión fied I n T a b l e l , Chapter 9.
protection haven't been investigated by a product
testing and listing agency and these coatings are 342.24 Bends. Raceway bends must not be made in any manner
known to cause cáncer in laboratory animáis. There's a docu- that would damage the raceway, or significantly change its internal
mented case where an electrician was taken to the hospital diameter (no kinks). The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any
for lead poisoning añer using a supplemental coating product field bend must not be less than shown in Table 2, Chapter 9.
(asphalted paint) in a poorly ventilated área As with all prod-
ucts, be sure to read and follow all product instructions, Author's Comment: This is usually not a probiem, because
inciuding material data safety sheets, particularly when petro- benders are made to comply with this table. However, when
leum-based chemicals (volatile organic compounds) may be using a hickey hender (short-radius hender), be careful not to
in the material. over-bend the raceway.
342.14 Dissimilar Metals. If practical, contact with dissimi- 342.26 Number of Bends (360°). To reduce the stress
lar metáis should be avoided to prevent the deterioration of the metal and friction on conductor insulation, the máximum number of bends
because of galvanic action. Aluminum fittings and enclosures, how- (inciuding offsets) between pulí points must not exceed 360°. Figure
ever, are permitted with steel intermedíate metal conduit. 342-2
342.20 Trade Size.

IMC - N u m b e r of Bends
(A) Minimum. Intermedíate metal conduit smaller than trade size Vi 342.26
must not be used.
(B) Máximum. Intermedíate metal conduit larger than trade size 4 90°
must not be used. To reduce the stress a n d friction on

conductor insulation, the total amount
of bends (inciuding offsets) between
342.22 Number of Conductors. The number of conductors
pulí points can't e x c e e d 3 6 0 ° .
in IMC isn't permitted to exceed the percentage fill specified in Table
1, Chapter 9. Raceways must be large enough to permit the instal- There's n o m á x i m u m
distance b e t w e e n pulí points.
iation and removal of conductors without damaging the conductor
insulation. When all conductors in a raceway are the same size and Pulí Points
insulation, the number of conductors permitted can be found in Annex
Copyrtgnt 2011, www.l*lteHofl.com
Cfor the raceway type.
Figure 342-2
trade size 11MC?
(a) 12 (b) 14 (c) 16 18 Author's Comment There's no máximum distance between

pulí boxes because this is a design issue, not a safety issue.
Answer: (d) 18 conductors [Annex C, Table C4]
342.28 Reaming. When the raceway is cut in the field, reaming

is required to remove the burrs and rough edges.
Intermedíate Metal Conduit (Type IMC) 342.30
Auttior's Comment: It's a commonly accepted practice to ream IMC - Secureiy Fastened to Structural Members
small raceways with a screwdriver or the backside of pliers. 342.30(A)(2l
However, when the raceway is cut with a three-wheel pipe
cutter, a reaming tool is required to remove the sharp edge of
the indented raceway. When conduits are threaded in the field,
the threads must be coated with an eiectrically conductive, cor- Coupling is O k a y Secured
rosion-resistant compound approved by the authority having
jurisdiction, in accordance with 300.6(A).
Máximum Máximum
5ft 5ft
342.30 Securing and Supporting. intermedíate metal
conduit must be installed as a complete system in accordance with
W h e r e structural m e m b e r s don't permit fastening within
300.18 [300.10 and 300.12], and it must be secureiy fastened in 3 ft of termination, it must be secured within 5 ft.
place and supported in accordance with (A) and (B).
Copyngnt 2011 <vwvt WikeHoll.coni
(A) Secureiy Fastened. IMC must be secured in accordance with one

Figure 342-4
ofthe following:
(1J Fastened within 3 ft of each outlet box, junction box, device box,
(B) Supports.
cabinet, conduit body, or other conduit termination. Figure 342-3
(1) General. Intermedíate metal conduit must generally be supported
at intervals not exceeding 10 ft.
(2) Straight Horizontal Runs. Straight horizontal runs made with

IMC - Secureiy Fastened
342.30(A)Ca threaded couplings can be supported ín accordance with the dis-
3ft 3ft tances lísted in Table 344.30{B)(2). Figure 342-5
Termination Termination
I M C - Support of Straight R u n s
342.30{B){2)
Trade Size 1 I M C
Intermedíate metal conduit must be secureiy fastened Table 344.30(B)(2)
within 3 ft of every box, cabinet, or termination fitting. 12 ft B e t w e e n Supports
C o p y n ^ 301 \. Mnn>MikeHo«.com
Figure 342-3 3fl 12ft 12ft

Straight horizontal runs m a d e with threaded
couplings can be supported in a c c o r d a n c e with
Author's Comment: Fastening is required within 3 ft of termi- the distances listed in Table 344.30(B)(2).
nations, not within 3 ft of each coupling.
CotiyógM 2011, ww*.M*oHolt.co(n
¡2) When structural members don't permit the raceway to be secured Figure 342-5
within 3 ft of a box or termination fitting, the raceway must be
secured within 5 ft of the termination. Figure 342-4
^ Conduits aren't required to be secureiy fastened within 3 ft of the

service head for an above-the-roof termination of a mast.

342.42 Intermedíate Metal Conduit (Type IMC)
Author's Comment: IMC must be provided with expansión fit-

Table 344.30(B)(2)
tings if necessary to compénsate for thermai expansión and
Trade Size Support Spacing contraction [300.7{B)]. The expansión characteristics for metal
raceways are determined by multipiying the valúes from Table
lOft
352.44 by 0.20, and the expansión characteristics for aluminum
1 i 2 r raceways is determined by multipiying the valúes from Table
VA~V/? 14ft 352.44 by0.40 [300.7 Note].
2 - 2V7 16ft
3 and larger 20 ft 342.42 Couplings and Connectors.
(A) Instaliation. Threadless couplings and connectors must be made
(3) Vertical Rlsers. Exposed vertical risers for fixed equipment can
up tight to maintain an effective ground-fault current path to safely
be supported at intervals not exceeding 20 ft, if the conduit is made
conduct fault current in accordance with 250.4(A)(5), 250.96(A), and
up with threaded couplings, firmiy supported, secureiy fastened at the
300.10.
top and bottom of the riser, and if no other means of support is avail-
able. Figure 342-6
Author's Comment: Loóse locknuts have been found to bum
clear before a fault was cleared because loóse termination fit-
tings increase the impedance of the fault current path.
IMC - Support of Vertical Risers
342.30{B)(3}
If buried in masonry or concrete, threadless fittings must be the con-
crete-tight type. If installed in wet locations, fittings must be listed for
use in wet locations in accordance with 314.15(A).
Threadless couplings and connectors must not be used on threaded
H Exposed vertical risers c a n conduit ends unless listed for the purpose.
Upto
H be supported at intervals not 2 0 ft
exceeding 20 ft if firmiy (B) Running Threads. Running threads aren't permitted for the con-
supported and secured at t h e nection of couplings, but they're permitted at other locations. Figure
top and bottom of the riser.
342-7
IMC - Running Threads

342A2{B)
C C f i y r ^ 2011. <mM,MlwHolUom
Running
Thread
Figure 342-6
Okay Between T h r e a d e d Coupling
r/
Boxes or Enclosures
(4) Horizontal Runs. Conduits installed horizontally in bored or
punched holes in wood or metal framing members, or notches in
wooden members are considered supported, but the raceway must
be secured within 3 ft of termination. B iw I
VIOLATION
Copyright 2011. www.MlkeHon.com
Running threads aren't permitted for the connection

of couplings, but they are permitted at other locations.
Figure 342-7
366 fñlke Holt's lllustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Intermedíate Metal Conduit (Type IMC) 342.46
342.46 Bushings. l o protect conductors from abrasión, a metal IMC - Bushings

or plástic bushing must be installed on conduit terminahon threads, 342.46 Note
Threaded Fitting Hub or Boss
regardiess of conductor size, unless the box, fitting, or enclosure is
Termination Termination Termination
designed to provide this protection.
Note: Conductors 4 AWG and larger that enter an enclosure must

be protected from abrasión, during and after instaliation, by a fit-
ting that provides a smooth, rounded, insulating surface, such as an
insulating bushing, unless the design of the box, fitting, or enclosure
provides equivalent protection, in accordance with 300.4{G). Figure
342-«
A n y Size 4 AWG 6 AWG A n y Size

Conductor a n d Larger and Smaller Conductor
Bushing Bushing Bushing Not Bushing Not
Required Required Required Required
Conductors 4 A W G a n d larger must b e protected by a

fitting that provides a s m o o t h , r o u n d e d , insulating surface,
s u c h a s an insulating bushing [300.4(G)].
Figure 342-8

ARTICLE
Rigid Metal Conduit
344 (Type RMC)
INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 344—RIGID METAL CONDUIT (TYPE RMC)
Rigid metal conduit, commonly called "rigid," has long been the standard raceway for providing protection from physical impact and from
difficult environments. The outside diameter of rigid metal conduit is the same as intermedíate metal conduit. However, the wall thickness
of rigid metal conduit is greater than intermedíate metal conduit; therefore it's a smaller interior cross-sectional área. Rigid metal conduit
is heavier and more expensive than intermedíate metal conduit, and it can be used in any location. Rigid metal conduit is manufactured in
both galvanized steel and aluminum; the steel type is much more common.
PART I. GENERAL Author's Comment: When the mechanical and physical char-
acteristics of rigid metal conduit are desired and a corrosive
344.1 Scope. Article 344 covers the use, instaliation, and con- environment is anticipated, a PVC-coated raceway system is
struction specifications of rigid metal conduit and associated fittings. commonly used. This type of raceway is frequently used in the
petrochemical industry, The common trade ñame of this coated
344.2 Definition. raceway is "Plasti-bond®," and it's commonly referred to as "Rob
Roy conduit." The benefits of the improved corrosión protec-
Rigid Metal Conduit (Type HMC). A listed metal raceway of circu-
tion can be achieved only when the system is properiy installed.
lar cross section with integral or associated couplings, listed for the
Joints must be sealed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instaliation of electrical conductors, and used with listed fittings to
instructions, and the coating must not be damaged with tools
provide electrical continuity. Figure 344-1
such as benders, pliers, and pipe wrenches. Couplings are avail-
able with an extended skirt that can be properiy sealed after
instaliation.
Rigid Metal Conduit (Type R M C )
344.2 Definition
344.6 Listing Requirements. Rlgld metal conduit, elbows,
couplings, and associated fittings must be listed.
A listed metal circular raceway that c a n be

threaded with integral or associated couplings. PART II. INSTALLATION
Compression Set Screw
(A) Atmospheric Conditions and Occupancies.
(1) Galvanized Steel and Stainless Steel. Galvanized steel and

stainless steel rigid metal conduit is permitted in all atmospheric con-
Threadless R M C Fittings
Copynghl 2011, «WH.lAkeHoH oom ditions and occupancies.
Figure 344-1 (2) Red Brass. Red brass rigid metal conduit is permitted for direct
burial and swimming pool applications.
Rigid Metal Conduit (Type RMC) 344.26
(3) Aluminum. Rigid aluminum conduit is permitted if judged suitable

for the environment.
trade size V/zRfi/IC?
(B) Corrosión Environments.
(a) 16 (b)18 (c)20 (d)22
(1) Galvanized Steet and Stainless Steel. Rigid metal conduit fit-
Answer: 22 conductors [Annex C, Table C8]
tings, elbows, and couplings can be installed in concrete, in direct
contact with the earth, or in áreas subject to severe corrosive influ-
ences judged suitable for the condition.
Author's Comment: See 300.17 for additional examples on
(2) Aluminum. Rigid aluminum conduit must be provided with sup- how to size raceways when conductors aren't all the same size.
plementary corrosión protection approved by the authority having
jurisdiction if encased in concrete or in direct contact with the earth. Cables can be installed in rigid metal conduit, as long as the number
of cables doesn't exceed the allowable percentage fill specified in
(C) Cinder FUI. Galvanized steel, stainless steel, and red brass RMC Table 1, Chapter 9.
is permitted in or under cinder fill subject to permanent moisture,
when protected on all sides by a layer of noncinder concrete not less 344.24 Bends. Raceway bends must not be made in any manner
than 2 in. thick; where the conduit isn't less than 18 in. under the that would damage the raceway, or significantly change its internal
fill; or where protected by corrosión protection judged suitable for the diameter (no kinks). The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any
condition. field bend must not be less than shown in Table 2, Chapter 9.
• -1>-
(D) Wet Locations. Support fittings, such as screws, straps, and so

Author's Comment: This is usually not a probiem because
forth, installed in a wet location must be made of corrosion-resistant
benders are made to comply with this table, However, when
material or protected by corrosion-resistant coatings in accordance
using a hickey hender (short-radius hender), be careful not to
with 300.6.
over-bend the raceway.
/ \: Supplementary coatings (asphalted paint)

for corrosión protection haven 't t}een investigated by 344.26 Number of Bends (360''). To reduce the stress
a product testing and listing agency and these coat- and friction on conductor insulation, the máximum number of bends
ings are known to cause cáncer in laboratory animáis. (inciuding offsets) between pulí points must not exceed 360°. Figure
344-2
344.14 Dissimilar Metals. If practical, contact with dissimi-

lar metáis should be avoided to prevent the deterioration of the metal
because of galvanic action. Aluminum fittings and enclosures are per- R M C - N u m b e r of B e n d s
344.26
mitted, however, with rigid metal conduit.
344.20 Trade Size. 90° 90°
(A) Mínimum. Rigid metal conduit smaller than trade size ¥2 must not To reduce t h e stress and friction on
conductor insulation, the total a m o u n t
be used. of bends (inciuding offsets) between
pulí points can't e x c e e d 360o.
(B) Máximum. Rigid metal conduit larger than trade size 6 must not
150
be used. There's no m á x i m u m
15°
distance b e t w e e n pulí points.
344.22 Number of Conductors. Raceways must be large
— P u l í Points \r—-^^ o
enough to permit the instaliation and removal of conductors without
o
damaging the conductors' insulation. When all conductors in a race-
way are the same size and insulation, the number of conductors per-
mitted can be found in Annex C for the raceway type.
Figure 344-2
Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.IVIikeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 369

344.28 Rigid Metal Conduit (Type RMC)
Author's Comment: There's no máximum distance between Author's Comment: Fastening is required within 3 ft of termi-
pulí boxes because this is a design issue, not a safety issue. nations, not within 3 ft of each coupling.
• When structural members don't permit the raceway to be

344.28 Reaming. When the raceway is cut in the field, reaming secured within 3 ft of a box or termination fitting, the raceway
is required to remove the burrs and rough edges. must be secured within 5 ft of the termination. Figure 344-4
• Conduits aren't required to be secureiy fastened within 3 ft of

Author's Comment: It's a commonly accepted practice to
the service head for an above-the-roof termination of a mast.
ream small raceways with a screwdriver or the backside of
pliers. However, when the raceway is cut with a three-wheel
pipe cutter, a reaming tool is required to remove the sharp edge
of the indented raceway. When conduit is threaded in the field,
R M C - Secureiy Fastened to Structural M e m b e r s
the threads must be coated with an eiectrically conductive, cor-
344.30(A)
rosion-resistant compound approved by the authority having
jurisdiction, in accordance with 300.6(A). ^ * * * % *
Coupling is O k a y ; Secured
344.30 Securing and Supporting. Rígid metal conduit
must be installed as a complete system in accordance with 300.18
[300.10 and 300.12], and it must be secureiy fastened in place and
supported in accordance with (A) and (B). Máximum Máximum
5ft 5ft
(A) Secureiy Fastened. RMC must be secured in accordance with
one of the following: Figure 344-3 W h e r e structural m e m b e r s don't permit fastening within
3 ft of termination, it must be secured within 5 ft.
• Fastened within 3 ft of each outlet box, junction box, device
box, cabinet, conduit body, or other conduit termination. Copyright 2011, ww*.M*eHoir com
Figure 344-4
R M C - Secureiy Fastened
344.30(A)
(B) Supports.
3ft 3ft
Termination Termination (1) General. Rigid metal conduit must be supported at intervals not
exceeding l O f t .
(2) Straight Horizontal Runs. Straight horizontal runs made with

threaded couplings can be supported in accordance with the dis-
tances listed in Table 344.30(B)(2). Figure 344-5
Rigid metal conduit must be secureiy fastened

within 3 ft of every box, cabinet, or termination fitting. Table 344.30(B)(2)
Trade Size Support Spacing
lOft
Copynghl 2011. www MiUHoll com
12 ft*
Figure 344-3
iy4-iK2 14ft
2-2^/2 16ft
3 and larger 20 ft
Rigid Metal Conduit (Type RMC) 344.42
R M C - Support of Straight Runs Author's Comment: Rigid metal conduit must be provided with
344.30(B)(2) expansión fittings if necessary to compénsate for thermai expan-
sión and contraction [300.7(B)]. The expansión characteristics
Trade Size 1 R M C
for metal raceways are determined by multipiying the valúes
Table 344.30(B)(2)
12 ft Between Supports from Table 3 5 2 . 4 4 by 0.20, and the expansión characteristics
for aluminum raceways is determined by multipiying the valúes
from Table 3 5 2 . 4 4 by 0 . 4 0 [300.7 Note].
344.42 Couplings and Connectors.

(A) Instaliation. Threadless couplings and connectors must be made
Straight horizontal runs m a d e with threaded
couplings can be supported in a c c o r d a n c e with up tight to maintain an effective ground-fault current path to safely
the distances listed in Table 344.30(B)(2). conduct fault current in accordance with 250.4(A)(5), 250.96{A), and
300.10.
C o p y l ^ 2011. vrww.MtaHcK.ixMn
i Figure 344-5 Author's Comment: Loóse locknuts have been found to burn
clear before a fault was cleared because loóse connections
increase the impedance of the fault current path.
(3) Vertical Risers. Exposed vertical nsers for fixed equipment can
be supported at intervals not exceeding 20 ft, if the conduit is made
If buried in masonry or concrete, threadless fittings must be the con-
up with threaded couplings, firmiy supported, secureiy fastened at the
crete-tight type. If installed in wet locations, fittings must be listed for
top and bottom of the riser, and if no other means of support is avail-
use in wet locations, in accordance with 314.15(A).
able. Figure 344-6
Threadless couplings and connectors must not be used on threaded
conduit ends, unless listed for the purpose.
R M C - Support of Vertical Risers
344.30(B)(3) (B) Running Threads. Running threads aren't permitted for the con-
nection of couplings, but they're permitted at other locations. Figure
344-7
T h r e a d e d Coupling
R M C - Running T h r e a d s
Exposed vertical risers c a n 344.42(B)
be supported at intervals not
exceeding 20 ft if firmiy
supported and secured at the
top and bottom of the riser.
Okay Between T h r e a d e d Coupling

Boxes Or Enclosures
Copyright 2011, wwwMkeHon.com
Figure 344-6 VIOLATION

Copyright 2011. www.MIkeHoncoir
Running threads aren't permitted for the connection

of couplings. but they are permitted at other locations.
(4) Horizontal Runs. Conduits installed horizontally in bored or
Figure 344-7
punched holes in wood or metal framing members, or notches in
wooden members, are considered supported, but the raceway must
be secured within 3 ft of termination.

344.46 Rigid IVIetal Conduit (Type RMC)
344.46 Bushings. To protect conductors from abrasión, a meta! R M C - Bushing Requirements

344.46 Note
or plástic bushing must be installed on conduit threads at termina-
Threaded , Fitting , Hub or Boss
tions, regardiess of conductor size, unless the box, fitting, or enclo-
Termination I Termination | Termination
sure is designed to provide this protection.
Note: Conductors 4 AWG and larger that enter an enclosure must

be protected from abrasión, dunng and after instaliation. by a fit-
ting that provides a smooth, rounded, insulating surface, such as an
insulating bushing, unless the design of the box, fitting, or enclosure
provides equivalent protection, in accordance with 300.4{G). Figure
344-8
A n y Size | 4 AWG 6 AWG ¡ Any Size

Conductor | a n d Larger and Smaller ! Conductor
Bushing Bushing Bushing Not Bushing Not
PART III. CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS Required Required Required Required
Copyoght 2011, www.M^.Mott com
344.130 Standard Lengths. The standard length of RMC is Conductors 4 A W G and larger must be protected by a
10 ft inciuding an attached coupling, and each end must be threaded. fitting that provides a s m o o t h , r o u n d e d , insulating surface,
Longer or shorter lengths with or without a coupling and threaded or such a s an insulating bushing [300.4(G)].
unthreaded are permitted.

Figure 344-8
372 Mike Hoit's iilustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
ARTICLE
Flexib
348 (Type
INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 348~-FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (TYPE FMC)
Flexible metal conduit (FMC), commonly called "Greenfieid" or "flex," is a raceway of an interlocked metal strip of either steel or alumi-
num. It's primarily used for the final 6 ft or less of raceways between a more rigid raceway system and equipment that moves, shakes, or
vibrates. Examples of such equipment include pump motors and industrial machinery.
PART I. GENERAL 348.20 Trade Size.
348.1 Scope. Article 348 covers the use, instaliation, and con- (A) Minimum. Flexible metal conduit smaller than trade size ¥2
struction specifications for flexible metal conduit and associated fit- must not be used, except trade size V?. can be used for the following
tings. applications:
(1) For enclosing the leads of motors.

348.2 Definition.
(2) Not exceeding 6 ft in length: Figure 348-1
Flexible Metal Conduit (Type FMC). A raceway of circular cross sec-
tion made of a helically wound, formed, interlocked metal strip.
348.6 Listing Requirements. Flexible metal conduit and F M C - Size

associated fittings must be listed. 348.20(A)(2)

348.10 Uses Permitted. Flexible metal conduit is permitted
exposed or concealed.

(1) In wet locations. Trade size 3/8 can be used in lengths not exceeding 6 ft
for utilization equipment or tap connections to luminaires.
(2) In hoistways, other than as permitted in 620.21 (A)(1).
Capyrtgnt 2011. www MilieHoltcoiK

(3) In storage battery rooms.
(4) In any hazardous location, except as permitted by 501.10(6). Figure 348-1
(5) Exposed to material having a deteriorating effect on the installed

conductors. a. For utilization equipment,
(6) Underground or embedded in poured concrete. b. As part of a listed assembiy, or
(7) If subject to physical damage. c. For luminaire tap connections, in accordance with 410.117(C).
Milce Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.Mil(eHolt.com • 888.NEC.CÜDE (632.2633) 373

348.22 Flexible Metal Conduit (Type FMC)
(3) In manufactured wiring systems, 604.6(A). 348.24 Bends. Bends must be made so that the conduit won't
be damaged, and its interna! diameter won't be effectively reduced.
(4) In hoistways, 620.21 (A)(1).
The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any field bend must not
(5) As part of a listed luminaire assembiy in accordance with be less than shown in Table 2, Chapter 9 using the column "Other
410.137(C). Bends."
(B) Máximum. Flexible metal conduit larger than trade size 4 must
348.26 Number of Bends (360°). To reduce the stress
not be used.
and friction on conductor insulation, the máximum number of bends
348.22 Number of Conductors. (inciuding offsets) between pulí points must not exceed 360°.
Trade Size Vz and Larger Flexible metal conduit must be large Author's Comment: There's no máximum distance between
enough to permit the instaliation and removal of conductors without pulí boxes because this is a design issue, not a safety issue.
damaging the conductors' insulation. When all conductors in a race-
way are the same size and insulation, the number of conductors per-
348.28 Trimming. The cut ends of flexible metal conduit must
mitted can be found in Annex C for the raceway type.
be trimmed to remove the rough edges, but this isn't necessary if fit-
tings are threaded into the convolutions.

trade size 1 flexible metal conduit?
(A) Secureiy Fastened. Flexible metal conduit must be secureiy fas-
(a)2 (b)4 (c)6 (d)8
tened by a means approved by the authority having jurisdiction within
Answer: (c) 6 conductors [Annex C, Table C3] 1 ft of termination, and it must be secured and supported at intervals
not exceeding 4V2 ft. Figure 348-2

how to size raceways when conductors aren't all the same size. F M C - Secureiy Fastened
348.30(A)
Trade Size Va. The number and size of conductors in trade size ¥& flex-
ible metal conduit must comply with Table 348.22.

trade size 3€ flexible metal conduit that uses outside fittings?
(ají (b)3 (05 (d)7
Answer: (b) 3 conductors [Table 348.22]

F M C must be secureiy fastened within 1 ft !
of termination a n d secured and supported !
at intervals not exceeding 41a ft.
One insulated, covered, or bare equipment grounding conductor of the
same size is permitted with the circuit conductors. See the "*" note at
the bottom of Table 348.22. Figure 348-2
Cables can be installed in flexible metal conduit as long as the

number of cables doesn't exceed the allowable percentage fill speci- Ex 1: Flexible metal conduit isn't required to be secureiy fastened or
fied in Table 1, Chapter 9. supported where fished behween access points through concealed
spaces and supporting is Impracticable.
374 Mike HoiVs liiustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Rexible Metal Conduit (Type FMC) 348.60
F M C - Unsecured in Accessible Ceilings

348.30(A) Ex 4
FMC - Unsecured Where Flexibility is Necessary

348.30(A) Ex 2
™ Last Point of [—-

Where flexibility is necessary, the m á x i m u m
Cable Support
unsecured length from the last point the FMC
is secureiy fastened must not e x c e e d :
• 3 f t f o r 1/2 through VU F M C
•4ftfor1V2 and 2 F M C
• 5 ft for 2V2 F M C and larger ,
Lengths not exceeding 6 ft can be unsecured within an

accessible ceiling for luminaire(s) or other equipment.
Máximum of 1 ft From
Tennination [348.30(A)]
Figure 348-4
F M C - Horizontal Support
348.30(B)
F M C run horizontally through framing m e m b e r s is

considered supported if secured within 1 ft of termination.
Figure 348-3
Metal Max. 4V2ft
Wood
Studs Between
Studs
Framing
f/; 5 n for trade sizes V2 tfirougfi VA Members
(2) 4 ft for trade sizes VÁ ttirougti 2

Securing Required Within
1 ft of Termination
(3) 5 ft for trade sizes 21/2 and iarger
Ex 4: FMC to a luminaire or electrical equipment within an accessible

ceiling ís permitted to be unsupported for not more than 6 ñ from the
iastpoint where the raceway is secureiy fastened. Figure 348-4 Figure 348-5
(B) Horizontal Runs. Flexible metal conduit installed horizontally

in bored or punched holes in wood or metal framing members, or 348.60 Grounding and Bonding. if flexibility is necessary
notches in wooden members, is considered supported, but the race- to minimize the transmission of vibration from equipment or to pro-
way must be secured within 1 ft of terminations. Figure 348-5 vide flexibility for equipment that requires movement after instalia-
tion, an equipment grounding conductor of the wire type must be
348.42 Fittings. Angle connectors must not be concealed. installed with the circuit conductors in accordance with 250.118(5),
based on the rating of the circuit overcurrent device in accordance
with 250.122. Figure 348-6

348.60 Flexible Metal Conduit (Type FMC)
F M C - Equipment Grounding Conductor Equipment G r o u n d i n g Conductor - F M C

Flexibility Required After Instaliation 348.60
348.60
Where flexibility is necessary to minimize W h e r e flexibility isn't necessary after

the transmission of vibration or to provide instaliation, a n d vibration isn't a c o n c e r n .
flexibility of equipment that requires F M C can serve a s t h e E G C w h e n :
movement after instaliation, an EGC of
the wire type is required. a. T h e conduit terminates in
listed fittings
b. T h e circuit is protected by a 2 0 A
or less device
c. 6 ft* c o m b i n e d length or less
S e e 250.118(5)
CopyiígW 2011. mm.UikeHo» com

*The total c o m b i n e d circuit
length of flex u s e d a s a n
e q u i p m e n t grounding conductor.
Figure 348-6
C«pyrtBW2011,www.M*«H(*eom
If flexibility isn't necessary after instaliation, and vibration isn't a

concern, the meta! armor of flexible metal conduit can sen/e as an
equipment grounding conductor if the circuit conductors contained in
the raceway are protected by an overcurrent device rated 20A or less, Figure 348-7
and the combined length of the flexible metal raceway in the same
ground-fault return path doesn't exceed 6 ft [250.118(5)]. Figure
348-7
If an equipment bonding jumper is installed outside of a raceway, the

length of the equipment bonding jumper must not exceed 6 ft, and
it must be routed with the raceway or enclosure in accordance with
250.102(E)(2).
Liquidtight Flexible Meta
ARTICLE
350 Conduit (Type LFMC)

INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 350—LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (TYPE LFMC)
Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC), with its associated connectors and fittings, is a flexible raceway commonly used for connections
ta equipment that víbrate or are required to move occasionally. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit is commonly called "Sealtight®" or "liquid-
tight" Liquidtight flexible metal conduit is of similar construction to flexible metal conduit, but it aiso has an outer liquidtight thermoplas-
tic covering. It has the same primary purpose as flexible metal conduit, but it aiso provides protection from moisture and some corrosive
effects.
PART I. GENERAL Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (Type LFMC)

350.2 Definition
struction specifications of liquidtight flexible metal conduit and asso-
ciated fittings.
Listed f
350.2 Definition. LFMC ^
Fittings
Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (Type LFMC). A raceway of circu-
lar cross section, having an outer liquidtight, nonmetallic, sunlight-
resistant jacket over an inner flexible metal core, with associated
A circular raceway having an outer
connectors and fittings for the instaliation of electric conductors. liquidtight, nonmetallic, sunlight-resistant
Rgure 350-1 jacket over a n inner flexible metal core.
Copyright 2011. www.P*keHo1Lcom

350.6 Listing Requirements. Liquidtight flexible metal con-
duit and its associated fittings must be listed. Figure 350-1

(1) If subject to physical damage.
(2) If the combination of the ambient and conductor operating tem-
(A) Permitted Use. Listed liquidtight flexible metal conduit is permit- peratures exceeds the rating of the raceway.
ted, either exposed or concealed, at any of the following locations:
(1) If flexibility or protection from liquids, vapors, or solids is required.

350.20 Trade Size.
(A) Minimum. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit smaller than trade
(2) In hazardous locations, as permitted in 501.10(B), 502.10(A)(2),
size Vi must not be used.
502.10(B)(2),or 503.10(A)(2).
Ex: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit can be smaller than trade size Y?
(3) For direct burial, if listed and marked for this purpose.
if installed in accordance with 348.20(A).
mWe Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633)

350.22 Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (Type LFMC)
Author's Comment: According to 348.20(A), LFMC smaller Author's Comment: See 300.17 for additional examples on
than trade size Yi is permitted for tfie following: how to size raceways when conductors aren't all the same size.
(1) For enclosing the leads of motors.

Cables can be installed in liquidtight flexible metal conduit as long
(2) Not exceeding 6 ftin length:
as the number of cables doesn't exceed the allowable percentage fill
a. For utilization equipment,
specified in Table 1, Chapter 9.
b. As part of a listed assembiy, or
c. For tap connections to luminaires as permitted by 410.117(0). (B) Raceway Trade Size Vb. The number and size of conductors in a
(3) In manufactured wiring systems, 604.6(A). trade size Vs liquidtight flexible metal conduit must comply with Table
(4) In hoistways, 620.21 (A)(1). 348.22.
(5) As part of a listed assembiy to connect wired luminaire sections,
410.137(0.
(B) Máximum. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit larger than trade size trade size 3€ LFMC that uses outside fittings?
4 must not be used.
(a)1 ib) 3 (0 5 (d)7
350.22 Number of Conductors. Answer: (b) 3 conductors [Table 348.22]
(A) Raceway Trade Size Vz and Larger. Raceways must be large

One insulated, covered, or bare equipment grounding conductor ofthe
damaging the insulation. When all conductors in a raceway are the
same size is permitted with the circuit conductors. See the "*" noteat
same size and insulation, the number of conductors permitted can be
the bottom of Table 348.22.
found in Annex C for the raceway type.
350.24 Bends. Bends must be made so that the conduit won't be

damaged and the internal diameter of the conduit won't be effectively
reduced. The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any field bend
trade size 1 LFMC? Figure 350-2
must not be less than shown in Table 2, Chapter 9 using the column
(a) 3 (b)5 (c)7 (d)9 "Other Bends."
Answer: (c) 7 conductors [Annex C, Table C. 7]

350.26 Number of Bends (360"*). To reduce the stress
(inciuding offsets) between pulí points must not exceed 360°.
Author's Comment: There's no máximum distance between

350.30 Securing and Supporting. Liquidtight flexible metal

conduit must be secureiy fastened in place and supported in accor-
dance with (A) and (B).
(A) Secureiy Fastened. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit must be

secureiy fastened by a means approved by the authority having juris-
diction within 1 ft of termination, and must be secured and supported
1 LFMC [Table C.7].
at intervals not exceeding 41/2 ft. Figure 350-3
W h e n all conductors in a raceway are the s a m e size
and insulation, the number of conductors permitted Ex 1: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit isn't required to be secureiy
can be found in A n n e x C. fastened or supported where fished behfi/een access points through
concealed spaces and supporting is impracticable.
Figure 350-2
378 Mike HoiVs liiustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electncal Code, Volume 1
Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (Type LFMC) 350.60
L F M C - Secureiy F a s t e n e d Ex 4: Lengths not exceeding 6 ft from the last point where the race-
350.30(A) way is secureiy fastened can be unsecured within an accessible ceil-
ing for luminaire(s) or other equipment.
(B) Horizontal Runs. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit installed hor-

1 ftof izontally in bored or punched holes in wood or metal framing mem-
Termination
bers, or notches in wooden members, is considered supported, but
Máximum the raceway must be secured within 1 ft of termination.

-of4V2 fl t DO
350.42 Fittings. Angle connectors must not be concealed.
I
350.60 Grounding and Bonding. If flexibility ¡s necessary
LFMC must be secureiy fastened within 1 ft of to minimize the transmission of vibration from equipment or to pro-
termination and at intervals not exceeding 4V2 ft.
vide flexibility for equipment that requires movement after instalia-
tion, an equipment grounding conductor of the wire type must be
Figure 350-3 installed with the circuit conductors in accordance with 250.118(6),
based on the rating of the circuit overcurrent device in accordance
Ex 2: If flexibility is necessary after instaliation, unsecured lengths with 250.122. Figure 350-5
from the last point where the raceway is secureiy fastened must not
exceed: Figure 350-4
L F M C - Equipment G r o u n d i n g Conductor
(1) 3 ñ for trade sizes Vz through VA Flexibility Required After Instaliation
350.60
(2) 4 ft for trade sizes VÁ through 2
(3) 5 ft for trade sizes 2Á and larger II
Where flexibility is necessary to minimize

the transmission of vibration or to provide
flexibility of equipment that requires
LFMC - Unsecured Where Flexibility is Necessary movement after instaliation. an EGC of
350.30(A)Ex2 the wire type is required.
W h e r e flexibility is necessary, the m á x i m u m

unsecured length from t h e last point the
L F M C is secureiy fastened must not e x c e e d :
• 3 f t f o r V2 through 11/4 L F M C
•4ftfor1V2and2LFMC
• 5 ft for 2V2 L F M C and larger Copynghl 2011. www MiksHolt com
Figure 350-5
M á x i m u m of 1 ft From
Tennination [350.30(A)]
If flexibility isn't necessary after instaliation, and vibration isn't a
V/a L F M C , M á x i m u m Unsecured Length is 3 ft concern, the metal armor of flexible metal conduit can serve as an
equipment grounding conductor if the circuit conductors contained in
the raceway are protected by an overcurrent device rated 20A or less,
and the combined length of the flexible metal raceway in the same
Copyngnt 2011. www.MUieHMt com
ground-fault return path doesn't exceed 6 ft [250.118(6)].
Figure 350-4 If an equipment bonding jumper is installed outside of a raceway, the

250.102(E)(2).

\
Rigid Polyvinyl Chioride

ARTICLE
352 Conduit (TYPE PVC)

INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 352—RIGIO POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT (TYPE PVC)
Rigid polyvinyl chioride conduit (PVC) is a rigid nonmetallic conduit that provides many of the advantages of rigid metal conduit, while allow-
ing instaliation in áreas that are wet or corrosive. It's an inexpensive raceway, and easily installed. It's lightweight, easily cut, glued together,
and relatively strong. However, conduits manufactured from polyvinyl chioride (PVC) are brittle when coId, and they sag when hot. This type
of conduit is commonly used as an underground raceway because of its low cost, ease of instaliation, and resistance to corrosión and decay.
PART I. GENERAL PART II. INSTALLATION

352.1 Scope. Article 352 covers the use, instaliation, and con- 352.10 Uses Permitted.
struction specifications of PVC conduit and associated fittings.
Note: In extreme coId, PVC conduit can become brittle, and is more
susceptible to physical damage.
352.2 Definition.
Rigió Polyvinyl Chioride Conduit (PVC). A rigid nonmetallic conduit of (A) Concealed. PVC conduit can be concealed within walls, floors, or
circular cross section with integral or associated couplings, listed for ceilings, directly buried or embedded in concrete in buildings of any
the instaliation of electrical conductors and cables. Figure 352-1 height.
(B) Corrosive Influences. PVC conduit is permitted in áreas subject

to severe corrosión for which the material is specifically approved by
Rigid Polyvinyl Chioride Conduit - Type P V C the authority having jurisdiction.
352.2 Definition
Author's Comment: If subject to exposure to chemical sol-

vents, vapors, spiashing, or immersion, materiais or coatings
must either be inherently resistant to chemicals based upon
their listing, or be identified for the specific chemical reagent
[300.6(0(2)].
Schedule 4 0 P V C (D) Wet Locations. PVC conduit is permitted in wet locations such as
with Integral Coupling
dairies, laundries, canneries, car washes, and other áreas frequently
washed or in outdoor locations. Support fittings such as straps,
Copyngni ^ 1 V www klkMott c o n P V C Fittings
screws, and bolts must be made of corrosion-resistant materiais, or
A rigid nonmetallic conduit with a circular cross must be protected with a corrosion-resistant coating, in accordance
section with integral or associated couplings.
with 300.6(A).
Figure 352-1 (E) Dry and Damp Locations. PVC conduit is permitted in dry and
damp locations, except where limited in 352.12.
Rjgjd Polyvinyl Chioride Conduit (TYPE PVC) 352.12
Exposed. Schedule 40 PVC conduit is permitted for exposed loca- (G) Underground. PVC conduit installed underground must comply
where not subject to physical damage. Figure 352-2 with the burial requirements of 300.5.
(H) Support of Conduit Bodies. PVC conduit is permitted to support
P V C in Exposed Locations nonmetallic conduit bodies that aren't larger than the largest trade
352.10(F) size of an entering raceway. These conduit bodies can't support lumi-
naires or other equipment, and aren't permitted to contain devices,
other than spiicing devices permitted by 110.14(B) and 314.16(C)(2).
(I) Insulation Temperature Limitations. Conductors rated at a tem-

Schedule 4 0 P V C conduit is
perature higher than the listed temperature rating of PVC conduit
permitted w h e r e not subject
physical d a m a g e . must not be operated at a temperature above the raceway's listed
temperature rating. Figure 3 5 2 - 4
P V C - Insulation Temperature Limitations

Copyngri12011 352.im
HWW.MikaHMlcorn
Figure 352-2
PVC SCH40 Max 900C Wire Sunlight Resistant
Ií PVC conduit is exposed to physical damage, the raceway must be

identified for the application.
Note: PVC Schedule 80 conduit is identified for use in áreas subject Conductors rated at a temperature higher than
to physical damage. Figure 352-3 the listed temperature rating of P V C conduit
must not be operated at a temperature above
the raceway's listed temperature rating.
Copyngtil 3011, www MêHoH com

P V C in Exposed Locations
352.10(F) Note
Figure 3 5 2 - 4
(A) Hazardous Locations. PVC conduit isn't permitted to be used

in hazardous locations except as permitted by 501.10(A)(1)(a) Ex,
503.10(A), 504.20, 514.8 Ex 2, and 515.8.
(2) In Class I, División 2 locations, except as permitted in 501.10(B)

(7).
(B) Support of Luminaires. PVC conduit must not be used for the
Schedule 8 0 P V C is identified for use
in áreas subject to physical d a m a g e . support of luminaires or other equipment not described in 352.1 OtH).
Author's Comment: PVC conduit is permitted to support con-

Figure 352-3
duit bodies in accordance with 314.23(E) Ex.
mke Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHoft.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 381

352.20 Rígíd Polyvinyl Chioride Conduit (TYPE PVC)
(0) Physical Damage. Schedule 40 PVC conduit must not be installed Cables can be installed in PVC conduit, as long as the number of
if subject to physical damage, unless identified for the application. cables doesn't exceed the allowable percentage fill specified in Table
1, Chapter 9.
Author's Comment: PVC Schedule 80 conduit is identified for
use in áreas subject to physical damage [352.10(F) Note]. 352.24 Bends. Raceway bends must not be made in any manner
that would damage the raceway, or significantly change its intemal
(D) Ambient Temperature. PVC conduit must not be installed if the
diameter (no kinks). The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any
ambient temperature exceeds 50°C (122°F). field bend must not be less than shown in Table 2, Chapter 9.
352.20 Trade Size. Author's Comment: Be sure to use equipment designed for
(A) Minimum. PVC conduit smaller than trade size must not be heating the nonmetallic raceway so it's pliable for bending (for
example, a "hot box"). Don't use open-flame torches.
used.
(B) Máximum. PVC conduit larger than trade size 6 must not be used.
(inciuding offsets) between pulí points must not exceed 360°. Figure
enough to permit the instaliation and removal of conductors with-
352-5
out damaging the conductors' insulation, and the number of conduc-
tors must not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified in
Table 1, Chapter 9.
P V C - N u m b e r of B e n d s
When all conductors in a raceway are the same size and insulation, 352.26
the number of conductors permitted can be found in Annex C for the

raceway type. 90° 90°
To reduce t h e stress a n d friction o n

conductor insulation, the total a m o u n t
Question: How many 4/0 THHN conductors can be installed in of bends (inciuding offsets) between
trade size 2 Sctiedule 40 PVC? pulí points can't exceed 3 6 0 ° . .^go
15°
(a)2(b)4 (c)6 ((98 15°
Answer: (b) 4 conductors [Annex C, Table CIO]
Copyiighl 2011. ww*.MIkcHoll com
T h e r e ' s n o m á x i m u m distance b e t w e e n pulí points.

Author's Comment: Schedule 80 PVC conduit has the same
outside diameter as Schedule 40 PVC conduit, but the wall
Figure 352-5
thickness of Schedule 80 PVC conduit is greater, which results
in a reduced interior área for conductor fill.
352.28 Trimming. The cut ends of PVC conduit must be trimmed

(inside and out) to remove the burrs and rough edges.
Question: How many 4/0 THHN conductors can be installed in
trade size 2 Schedule 80 PVC conduit?
Author's comment: Trimming PVC conduit is very easy; most
(a)3 (b)5 (c)7 (d)9 of the burrs will rub off with fingers, and a knife will smooth the
rough edges.
Answer: (a) 3 conductors [Annex C, Table C9]
352.30 Securing and Supporting. PVC conduit must be

secureiy fastened and supported in accordance with (A) and (B).
how to size raceways when conductors aren't all the same size.
Rigid Polyvinyl Cliloride Conduit (TYPE PVC) 352.44
|A) Secured. PVC conduit must be secured within 3 ft of every box, P V C - Expansión Fitting
Straight Run B e t w e e n 352.44
cabinet, or termination fitting, such as a conduit body. Figure 352-6 Two Secureiy
M o u n t e d Elbows
Expansión Fitting
P V C - Securing a n d Supporting
352.30
Expansión fitting(s) must be provided w h e r e t h e

c h a n g e in length of a straight run between secureiy
m o u n t e d Items is determined to be 1/4 in. or greater.
Figure 352-7
Author's Comment: Table 352.44 in the NEC was created

based on the following formula: Figure 352-8
Figure 352-6 Expansion/Contraction Inches =

Raceway Length/100 x [(Temp Change/100) x 4.00]
(B) Supports. PVC conduit must be supported at intervals not exceed-

ing the valúes in Table 352.30, and the raceway must be fastened in
a manner that permits movement from thermai expansión or contrac- P V C - E x p a n s i ó n Fittings
tion. See Figure 352-6. Table 352.44
Table 352.30 I Temperature Expansion/Contraction

B a s e d o n 100°F C h a n g e
Trade Size Support Spacing
^2-1 3ft
VA-2 5ft
6fí
3^-5 7ft
6 8ft
PVC conduit installed horizontally in bored or punched holes in wood 10 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 60 70 80 9 0 100

or metal framing members, or notches in wooden members, is con- NUMBER OF FEET copy.^h,2oii ^ m , . ^ i c ^
sidered supported, but the raceway must be secured within 3 ft of E x p n - C o n t In. = (Length/100) x (Temp C h a n g e / 1 0 0 x 4.0)
tennination.
Figure 352-8
352.44 Expansión Fittings. If PVC conduit is installed in a
straight run between secureiy mounted items, such as boxes, cabi-
nets, elbows, or other conduit terminations, expansión fittings must
be provided to compénsate for thermai expansión and contraction of
tíie raceway in accordance with Table 352.44, if the length change is
determined to be VA in. or greater. Figure 352-7
Milce Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.l\/líkeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 383

352.46 Rigid Polyvinyl Chioride Conduit (TYPE PVC)
Example: How much will a 25 fí run of PVC conduit contract 352.48 Joints. Joints, such as couplings and connectors, must
when it's located in an ambient temperature change of25°F? be made in a manner approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
(a)1 in. (b)2in. (c) 3 in (d) 4 in.

Author's Comment: Follow the manufacturer's instructions for
Answer: (a) 1 in. the raceway, fittings, and glue. Some glue requires the raceway
surface to be cleaned with a solvent before the application of the
Expansion/Contraction Inches = Raceway Length/100 x
glue. After appiying glue to both surfaces, a quarter turn of the
((Temp °F Change/100) x 4.00)
fitting is required.
Expansion/Contraction Inches = (25/100) x ((25/100) x 4.00)
Expansion/Contraction Inches = 0.25 in.
352.60 Equipment Grounding Conductor, if equipment
grounding is required, a sepárate equipment grounding conductor of
the wire type must be installed within the conduit [300.2(B)]. Figure
352.46 Bushings. Where a conduit enters a box, fitting, or other
352-10
enclosure, the wire must be protected from abrasión.
Note: Conductors 4 AWG and larger that enter an enclosure must be

protected from abrasión, during and after instaliation, by a fitting that P V C Grounding
provides a smooth, rounded insulating surface, such as an insulat- Equipment Grounding Conductors
ing bushing, unless the design of the box, fitting, or enclosure provides 352.60
equivalent protection, in accordance with 300.4(G). Figure 352-9
P V C - Bushings W h e r e a n equipment grounding

352.46 and Note conductor is required, a sepárate
equipment grounding conductor
of the wire type must be installed
within the conduit.
Figure 352-10
Ex 2:An equipment grounding conductor isn't required in PVC conduit

Conductors 4 A W G and larger require a fitting that
provides a smooth, rounded, insulating surface to protect if the neutral conductor is used to ground sen/ice equipment, as per-
the wire during and after instaliation. See 300.4(G). mitted in 250.142(A) [250.24(C)]. Figure 352-11
Figure 352-9
Author's Comment: When PVC conduit is stubbed into an

open-bottom switchboard, the raceway, inciuding the end fitting
(bell-end), must not rise more than 3 in. above the bottom of the
switchboard enclosure [300.16{B) and 408.5).
384 Mike HoiVs iiiustrated Guide to Understanding tiie 2011 Nationai Electrical Code, Volume 1
Rigid Polyvinyl Chioride Conduit (TYPE PVC) 352.60
P V C - Grounding
352.60 Ex 2
An equipment grounding conductor isn't required in

PVC if the service neutral conductor is connected to
tfie service equipment via the main bonding jumper.
Rgure 352-11

ARTICLE
• Liquidtight Flexible
" Nonmetallic Conduit
35tJ (Type LFNC)
INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 356—LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE NONMETALLIC CONDUIT (TYPE
LFNC)
Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit (LFNC) is a listed raceway of circular cross section having an outer liquidtight, nonmetallic, sunlight-
resistant jacket over an inner flexible core with associated couplings, connectors, and fittings.
PART I. GENERAL (1) Type LFNC-A (orange color). A smooth seamiess inner core and
cover having reinforcement layers between the core and cover.
struction specifications of liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit and (2) Type LFNC-B (gray color). A smooth inner surface with integral
associated fittings. reinforcement within the conduit wall.
(3) Type LFNC-C (black color). A corrugated internal and extemal

356.2 Definition.
surface without integral reinforcement.
Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit (Type LFNC). A listed race-
way of circular cross section, having an outer liquidtight, nonmetal- 356.6 Listing Requirement. Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic
lic, sunlight-resistant jacket over a flexible inner core, with associated conduit, and its associated fittings, must be listed.
couplings, connectors, and fittings, listed for the instaliation of electri-
cal conductors. Figure 356-1

Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit (Type L F N C ) 356.10 Uses Permitted. usted liquidtight flexible nonmetal-
356.2 Definition lic conduit is permitted, either exposed or concealed, at any of the fol-
lowing locations:
(1) If flexibility is required.
(2) If protection from liquids, vapors, or solids is required.
(3) Outdoors, if listed and marked for this purpose.
(4) Directly buried in the earth, if listed and marked for this purpose.
(5) LFNC-B {gray color) is permitted in lengths over 6 ft if secured

A circular raceway having a n outer
liquidtight, sunlight-resistant jacket according to 356.30.
over a flexible inner core.
(6) LFNC-B (black color) as a listed manufactured prewired assembiy.
(7) Encasement in concrete if listed for direct burial.

Figure 356-1
Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit (Type LFNC) 356.30
356.12 Uses Not Permitted. Question: How many 8 THHN conductors can be installed in
1) If subject to physicai damage. trade size ^ LFNC-B?
í2i If the combination of ambient and conductor temperature will pro- Answer: Six conductors [Annex C, Table C5]
duce an operating temperature above the rating of the raceway.
(31 Longer than 6 ft, except if approved by the authority having juris-
diction as essential for a required degree of flexibility.
(4} If the operating voltage of the contained conductors exceeds 600
volts, nominal. Cables can be installed in liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit, as
long as the number of cables doesn't exceed the allowable percent-
(5} In any hazardous location, except as permitted by 501.10(B),
age fill specified in Table 1, Chapter 9.
502.10(A) and (B),and 504.20.
356.24 Bends. Raceway bends must not be made in any manner

356.20 Trade Size.
that would damage the raceway or significantly change its internal
(A) Minimum. Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit smaller than diameter (no kinks). The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any
trade size Vi isn't permitted, except as permitted in the following: field bend musí not be less than shown in Table 2, Chapter 9 using the
column "Other Bends."
ili Enclosing the leads of motors, 430.245(B).
(2) For tap connections to lighting fixtures as permitted by 356.26 Number of Bends (360''). To reduce the stress
410.117(0). and friction on conductor insulation, the máximum number of bends
(inciuding offsets) between pulí points must not exceed 360°.
(B) Máximum. Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit larger than
trade size 4 isn't permitted.
Author's Comment: There's no máximum distance between
damaging the insulation. When all conductors in a raceway are the 356.30 Securing and Supporting, LFNC-B (gray color)
same size and insulation, the number of conductors permitted can be must be secureiy fastened and supported in accordance with one of
found in Annex C for the raceway type. Figure 356-2 the following: Figure 356-3
L F N C - Secureiy F a s t e n e d
356.3Q{A)
L F N C - N u m b e r of C o n d u c t o r s
356.22
1 ftof
Termination
Máximum
of3ft •
A m á x i m u m of six 8 T H H N
conductors can b e installed in
Va LFNC-B [Table C.5].
When all conductors in a raceway are the s a m e size L F N C m u s t be secureiy fastened within 1 ft of
and insulation, the n u m b e r of conductors permitted termination a n d at intervals not exceeding 3 f t .
can be f o u n d in A n n e x C.
mVñ Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHoltcom • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 387

356.42 Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit (Type LFNC)
(1) The conduit must be secureiy fastened at intervals not exceeding 356.60 Equipment Grounding Conductor, if equipment
3 ft, and within 1 ft of termination when installed longer than 6 ft. grounding is required, a sepárate equipment grounding conductor of
the wire type must be installed within the conduit [300.2(B)]. Figure
(2) Securing or supporting isn't required if it's fished, installed in
356-^
lengths not exceeding 3 ft at termináis if flexibility is required, or
installed in lengths not exceeding 6 ft for tap conductors to lumi-
naires, as permitted in 410.117(0).
L F N C - Equipment Grounding Conductor
(3) Horizontal runs of liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit installed W h e r e Flexibility is Required
horizontally in bored or punched holes in wood or metal fram-
ing members, or notches in wooden members, are consid-
ered supported, but the raceway must be secured within 1 ft of
termination.
(4) Securing or supporting of LFNC-B (gray color) isn't required if

installed in lengths not exceeding 6 ft from the last point where
the raceway is secureiy fastened for connections within an acces-
sible ceiling to luminaire(s) or other equipment.
356.42 Fittings. Oniy fittings listed for use with liquidtight flexi-
ble nonmetallic conduit can be used [300.15]. Angle connector fittings
must not be used in concealed raceway installations. Straight liquid-
tight flexible nonmetallic conduit fittings are permitted for direct burial Figure 356-4
or encasement in concrete.
If an equipment bonding jumper is installed outside of a raceway, the

Author's Comment: Conductors 4 AWG and larger that enter
an enclosure must be protected from abrasión, during and after
instaliation, by a fitting that provides a smooth, rounded, insu-
250.102(E)(2).
lating surface, such as an insulating bushing, unless the design
of the box, fitting, or enclosure provides equivalent protection, in
accordance with 300.4(G).
388 Mike HoiVs iiiustrated Guide to Understanding tt)e 2011 National Electrk)al Code, Volume 1
Electrical Metallic
ARTICLE
35 Tubing (Type EMT)

INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 358—ELECTRICAL METALUC TUBING CTYPE EMT)
Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) is a lightweight raceway that's relatively easy to bend, cut, and ream. Because it isn't threaded, all connec-
tors and couplings are of the threadless type and provide quick, easy, and inexpensive instaliation when compared to other metallic conduit
systems, which makes it very popular. Electrical metallic tubing is manufactured in both galvanized steel and aluminum; the steel type is the
most common type used.

struction specifications of electrical metallic tubing.
(A) Exposed and Concealed. Electrical metallic tubing is permitted
exposed or concealed.
358.2 Definition.
(B) Corrosión Protection. Electrical metallic tubing, elbows, cou-
Eléctrica! Metallic Tubing (Type EMT), A metallic tubing of circular
plings, and fittings can be installed in concrete, in direct contact with
cross section used for the instaliation and physical protection of elec-
the earth, or in áreas subject to severe corrosive influences if pro-
trical conductors when joined together with fittings. Figure 358-1
tected by corrosión protection and approved as suitable for the condi-
tion. Figure 358-2
Electrical Metallic Tubing (Type E M T )

358.2 Definition
EMT - Uses Permitted I ... i ' i
I
Installed in Concrete or Earth
358.10(B)
A metallic circular tubing used for the instaliation

and physical protection of electrical conductors. Galvanized EMT installed in concrete on grade or above
generally doesn't require supplemental corrosión protection.
Compression Set Screw
Galvanized EMT in a below grade slab, in H,
soil, or emerging from concrete to soil may
require supplemental corrosión protection. ;/
Threadless E M T Fittings
Figure 358-1
Figure 358-2
358.6 Listing Requirement. Eiectricai metallic tubing,

elbows, and associated fittings must be listed.
Milce Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHoltcom • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 389

358.12 Electrical Metallic Tubing (Type EMT)
/ \: Supplementary coatings for corrosión E M T - Uses N o t Permitted

protection (aspfialted paint) haven't been investi- 358.12(5)
gated by a product testing and listing agency and
these coatings are known to cause cáncer in laboratory
animáis.
VIOLATION
E M T isn't permitted
(C) Wet Locations. Support fittings, sucfi as screws, straps, and so ; to support luminaires
on, installed in a wet location must be made of corrosion-resistant or other equipment.
material, or a corrosion-resistant coating must protect them in accor-
dance with 300.6.
Author's Comment: Fittings used in wet locations must be

listed for the application (wet location) [314.15]. For more infor- CopyngM 2011. www MiKeHoil com
mation, visit http://wwAw.etpfittings.com/. iiiit/iÉr^ÉiittfttiiiMi

Figure 358-3
358.12 Uses Not Permitted. EMT must not be used under the
following conditions:
(1) Where, during instaliation or afterward, it will be subject to severe
physical damage.
damaging the conductor insulation. When all conductors in a raceway
(2) If protected from corrosión solely by enamel. are the same size and insulation, the number of conductors permitted
can be found in Annex 0 for the raceway type.
(3) In cinder concrete or cinder fill where subject to permanent mois-
ture, unless encased in not less than 2 in. of concrete.
(4) In any hazardous location, except as permitted by 502.10, Question: How many 12 THHN conductors can be installed in ^
503.10, and 504.20. trade size 1 FMT? Figure 358-4
(5) For the support of luminaires or other equipment (like boxes), (a) 26 (b)28 (0 30 (d)32
except conduit bodies no larger than the largest trade size of the Answer: (a) 26 conductors [Annex C, Table C. 1]
tubing that can be supported by the raceway. Figure 358-3
(6) If practical, contact with dissimilar metáis must be avoided to

prevent the deterioration of the metal because of galvanic action. Author's Comment: See 300.17 for additional examples on
Ex: Aluminum fittings are permitted on steel electrical metallic tubing,
and steel fittings are permitted on aluminum EMT. Cables can be installed in electrical metallic tubing, as long as the
number of cables doesn't exceed the allowable percentage fill speci-
358.20 Tíade Size.
fied in Table 1, Chapter 9.
(A) Minimum. Electrical metallic tubing smaller than trade size ^2
isn't permitted. 358.24 Bends. Raceway bends must not be made in any manner
that would damage the raceway, or significantly change its internal
(B) Máximum. Electrical metallic tubing larger than trade size 4 isn't
diameter (no kinks). The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any
permitted.
field bend must not be less than shown in Chapter 9, Table 2 for one-
shot and full shoe benders.
Author's Comment: This typically isn't a probiem, because

most benders are made to comply with this table.
390 Mike Hoit's iiiustrated Guide to Understanding tiie 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Electrical Metallic Tubing (Type EMT) 358.30
E M T - N u m b e r of Conductors 358.28 Reaming and Threading,

358.22
(A) Reaming. Reaming to remove the burrs and rough edges is
required when the raceway is cut.
Author's Comment: It's considered an accepted practice

to ream small raceways with a screwdriver or the backside of
pliers.
(B) Threading. Electrical metallic tubing must not be threaded.

A m á x i m u m of twenty six 12 T H H N conductors
can be installed in 1 E M T [Table C.1].
358.30 Securing and Supporting. Eiectricai metaiiic tubing
When all conductors in a raceway are the s a m e must be installed as a complete system in accordance with 300.18
size and insulation, the n u m b e r of conductors [300.10 and 300.12], and it must be secureiy fastened in place and
permitted can be found in A n n e x C.
supported in accordance with (A) and (B).
Rgure 3 5 8 ^
(A) Secureiy Fastened. Electrical metallic tubing must generally be
secureiy fastened within 3 ft of every box, cabinet, or termination fit-
358.26 Number of Bends (360°). To reduce the stress ting, and at intervals not exceeding 10 ft. Figure 358-6
and friction on conductor insulation, tfie máximum number of bends
(induding offsets) between pulí points can't exceed 360°. Figure
358-5
E M T - Secureiy Fastened
358.30(A}
E M T - Number o f Bends 3ft 10 ft M á x i m u m 3ft

358.26 Termination B e t w e e n Supports Termination
^
r
90° g
To reduce the stress and friction o n
conductor insulation, the total a m o u n t 3ft 6ft 4ft 3ft—
of bends (inciuding offsets) between
pulí points can't exceed 3 6 0 ° . 16ft
15°
15° E M T must be secureiy f a s t e n e d within 3 ft of

termination fittings a n d at intervals not e x c e e d i n g 10 ft.
C o p y r l ; ^ 2011. M M MiMHol com

• O
Copyngtn 2011. www Figure 358-6
There's no m á x i m u m distance between pulí points.
Figure 358-5 Author's Comment: Fastening is required within 3 ft of termi-

nation, not within 3 ft of a coupling.
Author's Comment: There's no máximum distance between Ex 1: When structural members don't permit the raceway to be
pulí boxes because this is a design issue, not a safety issue. secured within Sñofa box or termination fitting, an unbroken race-
way can be secured within Sftofa box or termination fitting. Figure
358-7

358.42 Electrical l\/letallic Tubing (Type EMT)
E M T - Secureiy Fastened to Structural M e m b e r s Author's Comment: Conductors 4 AWG and larger that enter
358.30(A) Ex 1
an enclosure must be protected from abrasión, during and after
VIOLATION instaliation, by a fitting that provides a smooth, rounded, insu-
E M T must be unbroken lating surface, such as an insulating bushing, unless the design
between termination in this c a s e .
of the box, fitting, or enclosure provides equivalent protection, in
^ * ^ I
* > » * * * accordance with 300.4{G}. Figure 358-8
- * " — - ^ - " - ^ '^^^ • * * r-^
E M T - Bushings
300.4(G)
Máximum Máximum n
5ft 5ft
í
Where structural m e m b e r s don't pennlt fastening within
3 ft of the termination, E M T must be secured within 5 ft.
Fitting Termination
Copynghl 2011. « w » M*«Holl.com
Figure 35&-7
4 AWG 6 AWG
(B) Horizontal Runs. Electrical metallic tubing installed horizontally a n d Larger a n d Smaller
Bushing Bushing Not
in bored or punched holes in wood or metal framing members, or
Required Required
notches in wooden members, is considered supported, but the race-
way must be secured within 3 ft of termination.
CopyriOM 2011. «ww.hMieHoli.com
358.42 Couplings and Connectors. couplings and connec-

Figure 358-8
tors must be made up tight to maintain an effective ground-fault cur-
rent path to safely conduct fault current in accordance with 250.4(A)
(5), 250.96(A), and 300.10.
If buried in masonry or concrete, threadless electrical metallic tubing

fittings must be of the concrete-tight type. If installed in wet loca-
tions, fittings must be listed for use in wet locations in accordance
with 314.15(A).
Electrical Nonmetallic
ARTICLE
362 Tubing (Type ENT)

INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 362—ELECTRICAL NONMETALLIC TUBING (TYPE ENT)
Electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT) is a pliable, corrugated, circular raceway made of polyvinyl chioride. In some parts of the country, the
field ñame for electrical nonmetallic tubing is "Smurf Pipe" or "Smurf Tube," because it was only available in blue when it originally came
out at the time the children's cartoon characters "The Smurfs" were most popular. Today, the raceway is available in a rainbow of colors
such as white, yellow, red, green, and orange, and is soid in both fixed lengths and on reels.

struction specifications of electrical nonmetallic tubing and associ-
Definition of First Floor. The first floor of a building is the floor with
ated fittings.
50 percent or more of the exterior wall surface área level with or
above finished grade. If one additional level not designed for human
362.2 Definition.
habitation and used only for vehicle parking, storage, or similar use
Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (Type ENT). A pliable corrugated race- is at ground level, then the first of the three permissible floors can be
way of circular cross section, with integral or associated couplings, the next higher floor
connectors, and fittings listed for the instaliation of electrical conduc-
(1) In buildings not exceeding three floors. Figure 362-2
tors. Figure 362-1
Electrical nonmetallic tubing can be bent by hand with a reasonable

forcé, but without other assistance. E N T - Building Not Over 3 Floors
362.10(1)
Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (Type E N T )

362.2 Definition
Listed E N T
Fittings
In a building not over 3 floors, E N T

j c a n be run e x p o s e d , concealed, or
^ above a s u s p e n d e d ceiling.
A pliable corrugated circular raceway with integral or

associated couplings, connectors, and fittings listed
for the instaliation of electrical conductors.
Copynghl 2011, www.MitieHollcoin

CopyrigM 2011. w«w,M<l*Holl«m
mke Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633)

362.10 Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (Type ENT)
a. Exposed, where not prohibited by 362.12. E N T - Fire Sprinkied Building

362.10(2) Ex
b. Concealed within walls, floors, and ceilings.
(2) In buildings exceeding three floors, electrical nonmetallic tubing

can be installed concealed in walls, floors, or ceilings that provide
a thermai barrier having a 15-minute finish rating, as identified in
listings of fire-rated assemblies. Figure 362-3
sprinkier System
(all floors)
uilding Over 3 Floors
362.10(2)
In buildings over 3 floors,

W h e n a ftre sprinkier s y s t e m is installed on
E N T must be concealed
all floors, E N T can be installed e x p o s e d or
behind floors, walls, or
, c o n c e a l e d regardiess of the finish rating.
ceilings that have a
15-minute fínish rating.
i n Figure 362-4
P^^î IJLJiLi.__:
Copynghl 2011, n w * MrtieMott.com

E N T - S u s p e n d e d Ceiling - Over 3 Floors
362.10(5)
Figure 362-3
Ex to (2): If a fire sprinlder system is installed on all floors, in accor-

dance with NFPA 13, Standard for the Instaliation of Sprinkier
E N T is pemnitted above a s u s p e n d e d ceiling
Systems, electrical nonmetallic tubing is permitted exposed or con- ^ 1 (not used for environmental air) if the suspended
cealed in buildings ofany height. Figure 362-4 L ¿ i ™ l ceiling provides a 15-minute finish rating.
(3) Electrical nonmetallic tubing is permitted in severe corrosive and

chemical locations, when identified for this use.
(4) Electrical nonmetallic tubing is permitted in dry and damp con-

cealed locations, if not prohibited by 362.12.
(5) Electrical nonmetallic tubing is permitted above a suspended ceil-

ing, if the suspended ceiling provides a thermai barrier having Figure 362-5
a 15-minute finish rating, as identified in listings of fire-rated

assemblies. Figure 362-5 (6) Electrical nonmetallic tubing can be encased or embedded in a
Ex: If a fire sprinkier system is installed on all floors, in accordance concrete slab provided fittings identified for the purpose are used.
with NFPA 13, Standard for the Instaliation of Sprinkier Systems, elec-
Author's Comment: Electrical nonmetallic tubing isn't permit-
trical nonmetallic tubing is permitted above a suspended ceiling that
ted in the earth [362.12(5)].
doesn't have a 15-minute finish rated thermai barrier material. Figure
362-6
Mike HoWs lllustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electncal Code, Volume 1
Electrical
E Nonmetallic Tubing (Type ENT) 362.12
ENT - Fire Sprinkied Buildings O v e r 3 Floors

E N T - Operating Temperature
A b o v e S u s p e n d e d Ceiling
362.10(9)
362.10(5) Ex
Conductors or cables rated above

the E N T temperature rating must
not opérate a b o v e the raceway's
listed temperature rating.
Suspended Sprinkier S y s t e m
' i Ceiling (all floors)
. i ^ V " »
Copynghl ?0t 1, www MMHolt com
Figure 3 6 2 - 7
W h e n a fire sprinkier system is installed o n all (6) Exposed in buildings over three floors, except as permitted by
floors, E N T c a n b e installed a b o v e a s u s p e n d e d
362.10(2) and (5) Ex.
ceiling regardiess of the finish rating.
(7) In assembiy occupancies or theaters, except as permitted by
Figure 362-6 518.4 and 520.5.
(8) Exposed to the direct rays of the sun for an extended period,
(7) Electrical nonmetallic tubing is permitted in wet locations indoors, unless listed as sunlight resistant.
or in a concrete slab on or below grade, with fittings listed for the
purpose. Author's Comment: Exposing electrical nonmetallic tubing to
the direct rays of the sun for an extended time may result in the
(8) Listed prewired electrical nonmetallic tubing with conductors is
product becoming brittle, unless it's listed to resist the effects of
permitted in trade sizes V2, % and 1. ultraviolet (UV) radiation. Figure 3 6 2 - 8
(9) Conductors rated at a temperature higher than the listed temper-

ature rating of ENT must not be operated at a temperature above
the raceways listed temperature rating. Figure 362-7 E N T - E x p o s e d t o Direct S u n
362.12(8)

(1) In any hazardous location, except as permitted by 504.20 and
505.15(A)(1).
(2) For the support of luminaires or equipment. See 314.2.
(3) If the ambient temperature exceeds 50°C (122°F).
(4) For direct earth burial.
Author's Comment: Electrical nonmetallic tubing can be

encased in concrete [362.10(6)].
(5) As a wiring method for systems over 600V.

Figure 362-8

362.20 Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (Type ENT)
(9) If subject to physical damage. Author's Comment: There's no máximum distance between
Author's Comment: Electrical nonmetallic tubing is prohibited
in ducts, cavity plenum spaces [300.22{C)], and patient care
362.28 Trimming. The cut ends of electrical nonmetallic tubing
área circuits in health care facilities [517.13(A)].
must be trimmed (inside and out) to remove the burrs and rough
edges. ,. • .
362.20 Trade Sizes.
Trimming electrical nonmetallic tubing is very easy; most of the burrs
(A) Minimum. Electrical nonmetallic tubing smaller than trade size Vi rub off with fingers, and a knife can be used to smooth the rough
isn't permitted. edges.
(B) Máximum. Eléctrica! nonmetallic tubing larger than trade size 2

362.30 Securing and Supporting. Eiectricai nonmetallic
isn't permitted.
tubing must be installed as a complete system in accordance with
362.22 Number of Conductors. Raceways must be large 300.18 [300.10 and 300.12], and it must be secureiy fastened in
enough to permit the instaliation and removal of conductors with- place and supported in accordance with (A) and (B).
out damaging the conductors' insulation, and the number of conduc- (A) Secureiy Fastened. Electrical nonmetallic tubing must be secured
tors must not exceed that permitted by the percentage fill specified in within 3 ft of every box, cabinet, or termination fitting, such as a con-
Table 1, Chapter 9. duit body, and at intervals not exceeding 3 ft. Figure 362-9
When all conductors in a raceway are the same size and insulation,
the number of conductors permitted can be found in Annex C for the
raceway type. ENT - Secured and Supported
362.30(A)

trade size Á ENT?
(a) 5 (b)7 (09 (d)11
Answer: (b) 7 conductors [Annex C, Table C2]

Cables can be installed in electrical nonmetallic tubing, as long as the

ENT installed horizontally through framing
cables don't exceed the allowable percentage fill specified in Table 1,
members is considered secured and supported.
Chapter 9.
Figure 362-9
362.24 Bends. Raceway bends must not be made in any manner
that would damage the raceway, or significantly change its internal
diameter (no kinks). The radius of the curve to the centerline of any Ex 2: Lengths not exceeding 6 ñ from the last point if the raceway is
field bend must not be less than shown in Chapter 9, Table 2, using secureiy fastened within an accessible ceiling to luminaire(s) or other
the column "Other Bends." equipment
Ex 3: If fished between access points through concealed spaces anú

supporting is impractical.
(inciuding offsets) between pulí points can't exceed 360°.
Mike HoiVs Iliustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (Type ENT) 362.60
(B) Horizontal Runs. Electrical nonmetallic tubing installed horizon- ENT - Equipment Grounding
tally in bored or punched holes in wood or metal framing members, or
notches in wooden members, is considered supported, but the race-
way must be secured within 3 ft of terminations.
362.46 Bushings. Conductors 4 AWG and larger that enter an

enclosure from a fitting must be protected from abrasión, during and
after instaliation, by a fitting that provides a smooth, rounded, insulat-
ing surface, such as an insulating bushing, unless the design of the
box, fitting, or enclosure provides equivalent protection, in accordance
www.Mik8Holt,com
with300.4{G).
W h e r e e q u i p m e n t g r o u n d i n g is required, a sepárate
e q u i p m e n t grounding conductor of t h e wire type must
362.48 Joints. Joints, such as couplings and connectors, must
be installed in t h e raceway.
be made in a manner approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
Figure 3 6 2 - 1 0
Author's Comment: Follow the manufacturer's instructions for
the raceway, fittings, and glue, According to product listings, PVC
conduit fittings are permitted with electrical nonmetallic tubing.
/ \: Glue used with electrical nonmetallic tubing

must be listed for ENT. Glue for PVC conduit must not
be used with electrical nonmetallic tubing because it
damages the plástic from which ENTis manufactured.
362.60 Equipment Grounding Conductor, if equipment

grounding is required, a sepárate equipment grounding conductor of
the wire type must be installed within the raceway. Figure 3 6 2 - 1 0
Milce Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHoltcom • 888.NEC.G0DE (632.2633) 397

ARTICLE
376 Metal Wireways

INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 376—METAL WIREWAYS
Metal wireways are commonly used wtiere access to the conductors within the raceway is required to make terminations, spiices, or taps
to several devices at a single location. High cost precludes their use for other than short distances, except in some commercial or industrial
occupancies where the wiring is frequently revised.
Author's Comment: Both metal wireways and nonmetallic wireways are often called "troughs" or "gutters" in the field.
PART 1. GENERAL PART II. INSTALLATION

struction specifications of metal wireways and associated fittings.
(1) Exposed.
376.2 Definition. (2) In any hazardous locations, as permitted by other articles in the
Cade.
Metal Wireway. A sheet metal trough with hinged or removable
covers for housing and protecting electric conductors and cable, and (3) Wet locations where listed for the purpose.
in which conductors are placed after the wireway has been installed.
(4) Unbroken through walls, partitions, and floors.
Figure 376-1
Author's Comment: See 501.10{B), 502.10(B), and 504.20 for

metal wireways used in hazardous locations.
Metal W i r e w a y
376.2 Definition
(1) Where subject to severe physical damage.
(2) Where subject to corrosive environments.
376.21 Conductors—IVIaximum Size. i h e máximum size

conductor permitted in a wireway must not be larger than that for
which the wireway is designed.
A sheet metal trough with hinged or removable covers for 376.22 Number of Conductors and Ampacity. The
housing and protecting electnc wires and cable, and in which number of conductors and their ampacity must comply with 376.22{A)
conductors are placed after the wireway has been installed.
and (B).
(A) Number of Conductors. The máximum number of conductors

Figure 376-1
permitted in a wireway is limited to 20 percent of the cross-sectional
área ot the wireway. Figure 376-2
Metal Wireways 376.56
Wireway - Number of Conductors Signaling and motor control conductors between a motor and its
starter used only for starting duty aren't considered current carrying
for conductor ampacity adjustment.
The máximum number of conductors permitted in a
wireway is limited to 20 percent of the cross-sectional
área of the wireway. 376.23 Wireway Sizing.
(A) Sizing for Conductor Bending Radius. If conductors are bent

^.1
í,'—J L^t .
within a metal wireway, the wireway must be sized to meet the bend-
ing radius requirements contained in Table 312.6(A), based on one
B 9 p v
Site
wire per terminal. Figure 376-4
CBp|«igMM11
W i r e w a y Sizing
Conductor Bending Radius
376.23(A)
Rgure 376-2
Author's Comment: Spiices and taps must not fill more than
75 percent of the wiring space at any cross section [376.56].
(B) Conductor Ampacity Adjustment Factors. When more than 30

current-carrying conductors are installed in any cross-sectional área
ofthe wireway, the conductor ampacity, as listed in Table 310.15(B)
W h e r e conductors are bent, the wireway must be
(16), must be adjusted in accordance with Table 310.15(B)(3)(a). sized t o meet the bending radius of Table 312.6{A),
Figure 376-3 based o n o n e wire per terminal.
Copynght20t1. wwwPiU<aHoll.coiT>
Figure 376-4
Wireway - Conductor A m p a c i t y
376.22(B)
When more than 3 0 current-carrying conductors 376.30 Supports. Wireways must be supported in accordance
are installed in any cross-sectional área, conductor
with (A) and (B).
ampacity from Table 310.15(B){16) must be adjusted
in accordance with 310.15(B)(3)(a). (A) Horizontal Support. If installed honzontally, metal wireways must
be supported at each end and at intervals not exceeding 5 ft.
(B) Vertical Support. If installed vertically, metal wireways must be

SS* Man Mw Uw> Mw HH. • É l secureiy supported at intervals not exceeding 15 ft, with no more than
lof» So(6 leit idt 5*8 6oíS
1 2 3 4 5 6 one joint between supports.
r 376.56 Spiices, Taps, and Power Distribution Biocics.

ii
(A) Spiices and Taps. Spiices and taps in metal wireways must be
ímmmámm accessible, and they must not fill the wireway to more than 75 per-
Figure 376-3 cent of its cross-sectional área. Figure 376-5
Author's Comment: The máximum number of conductors

permitted in a metal wireway is limited to 20 percent of its
cross-sectional área at any point [376.22(A)].
Mike Holt Enterprises. Inc. • www.MikeHoltcom • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 399

376.56 Metal Wireways
Power distribution biocks must not have uninsulated

Spiices and taps must be accessible a n d not fill more e x p o s e d live parts in the metal w i r e w a y after instaliation
than 7 5 % of the cross-sectional área of the wireway. w h e t h e r or not the w i r e w a y cover is installed.
(B) Power Distribution Biocks.
(1) Instaliation. Power distribution biocks installed in wireways must

be listed.
(2) Size of Enclosure. In addition to the wiring space requirements

[376.56(A)], the power distribution block must be installed in a metal
wireway not smaller than specified in the instaliation instructions of
the power distribution block.
(3) Wire-Bending Space. Wire-bending space at the termináis of

power distribution biocks must comply with 312.6(B).
(4) Live Parts. Power distribution biocks must not have uninsulated
exposed live parts in the metal wireway after instaliation, whether or
not the wireway cover is installed. Figure 376-6
400 Mike HolVs lllustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Eleotrical Code, Volume 1
ARTICLE
380 Multioutlet Assemblies

INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 380—MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES
A multioutlet assembiy is a surface, flush, or freestanding raceway designed to hold conductors and receptacles, and is assembled in the
field or at the factory [Article 100]. It's not limited to systems commonly referred to by the trade ñames "Plugtrak®" or "Plugmoid®."
PARI L GENERAL PART IL INSTALLATION

380.1 Scope. Article 380 covers the use, instaliation, and con- 380.10 Uses Permitted. Multioutlet assemblies are only per-
struction specifications of multioutlet assemblies. mitted in dry locations.
Author's Comment: A multioutlet assembiy is a surface, flush 380.12 Uses Not Permitted.
or freestanding raceway designed to hold conductors and recep-
(1) Concealed.
tacles assembled in the field or at the factory [Article 100].
Figure 380-1 (2) If subject to severe physical damage.
(3) If the voltage is 300V or more between conductors, unless the

metal has a thickness not less than 0.04 in.
Multioutlet A s s e m b i y
(4) If subject to corrosive vapors.
Article 100 Defir)ition
(5) In hoistways.
Freestanding
Power Pole (6) In any hazardous location, except as permitted by 501.10(B).
380.76 Througli Partitions. Metal multioutlet assemblies can

pass through a dry partition provided no receptacle is concealed in
the wall, and the cover of the exposed portion of the system can be
removed.
A surface, flush, or freestanding raceway designed

to hold conductors a n d receptacles assembled in t h e
field or at the factory.
Figure 380-1

ARTICLE
Surface Metal Raceways

INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 386—SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS
A surface metal raceway is a common method of adding a raceway when exposed traditional raceway systems aren't acceptable, and con-
cealing the raceway isn't economically feasible. It comes in several colors, and is now available with colored or real wood inserts designed
to make it look like molding rather than a raceway. Surface metal raceway is commonly known as "Wiremoid®" in the field.
PART I. GENERAL Author's Comment: Surface metal raceways are available in

different shapes and sizes and can be mounted on walls, ceil-
386.1 Scope. This article covers the use, instaliation, and con- ings, or floors. Some surface metal raceways have two or more
struction specifications of surface metal raceways and associated fit- sepárate compartments, which permit the separation of power
tings. and lighting conductors from low-voltage or limited-energy con-
ductors or cables (control, signal, and Communications cables
386.2 Definition. and conductors) [386.70].
Surface Metal Raceway. A metallic raceway intended to be mounted

to the surface, with associated accessories, in which conductors are 386.6 Listing Requirements. Surface metal raceways and
placed after the raceway has been installed as a complete system associated fittings must be listed.
[300.18(A)]. Figure 380-1
Author's Comment: Enclosures for switches, receptacles,
luminaires, and other devices are identified by the markings on
Surface Metal R a c e w a y s their packaging, which identify the type of surface metal race-
386.2 Definition way that can be used with the enclosure.

(1) In dry locations. Figure 386-2
(2) In Class I, División 2 locations, as permitted in 501.10{B)(3).

A raceway intended l o be m o u n t e d to the surface,
(3) Under raised floors, as permitted in 645.5(E)(2).
in which conductors are placed after the raceway
has been installed as a complete s y s t e m .
(4) Run through walls and floors, if access to the conductors is main-
Copyright 2011. www UkeHott.ccxn
tained on both sides of the wall, partition, or floor.
Figure 386-1
402 Mike HolVs lllustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrk)al Code, Volume 1
Surface Metal Raceways 386.60
Surface Metal Raceway - Dry Locations The ampacity adjustment factors of 310.15(B)(3)(a) don't apply to
386.10(1)
conductors installed in surface metal raceways if all of the following
conditions are met: Figure 386-3
Suspended Ceiling
Surface R a c e w a y - Conductor Fill

Surface metal raceways 386.22
are permitted to be installed
ín dry locations.
T h e ampacity adjustment factors o f

310.15{B){3)(a) don't apply w h e r e
all o f t h e following conditions are met:
(1) T h e cross-sectional área exceeds
4 sq in.,
(2) T h e n u m b e r of current-carrying
conductors doesn't exceed 30, a n d
(3) T h e conductor fill doesn't exceed
CopyiWH 2011. MM>.Wk9Holl com 2 0 % of the cross-sectional área
of the raceway.
Figure 386-2
Copyright 2011, www.WKeHcXi.i^
386.12 Uses Not Permitted. Figure 386-3
(1) If subject to severe physical damage, unless othenwise approved

by the authority having jurisdiction.
( 1 ) The cross-sectional área of the raceway exceeds 4 sq in.
(2) If the voltage is 300V or more behween conductors, unless the
(2) The number of current-carrying conductors doesn't exceed 30,
metal has a thickness not less than 0.04 in.
and
(3} If subject to corrosive vapors.
(3) The sum of the cross-sectional áreas of all contained conductors
(4) In hoistways. doesn't exceed 20 percent of the interior cross-sectional área of
the raceway.
(5) If concealed, except as permitted in 386.10.
386.30 Securing and Supporting. Surface metal raceways

386.21 Size of Conductors. The máximum size conductor
must be secured and supported at intervals in accordance with the
permitted in a surface metal wireway must not be larger than that for
manufacturer's instaliation instructions.
which the wireway is designed.
386.56 Spiices and Taps. Spiices and taps must be acces-

Author's Comment: Because partial packages are often pur-
sible, and must not fill the raceway to more than 75 percent of its
chased, you may not always receive this information.
cross-sectional área.
386.22 Number of Conductors. The number of conduc- 386.60 Equipment Grounding Conductor. Surface metal
tors or cables installed in a surface metal raceway must not be more raceway fittings must be mechanically and eiectrically joined together
than the number for which the raceway is designed. Cables can be in a manner that doesn't subject the conductors to abrasión. Surface
installed in surface metal raceways as long as the number of cables metal raceways that allow a transition to another wiring method, such
doesn't exceed the allowable percentage fill specified in Table 1, as knockouts for connecting raceways, must have a means for the
Chapter 9. termination of an equipment grounding conductor. A surface metal
raceway is considered suitable as an equipment grounding conductor,
in accordance with 250.118(14).

386.70 Surface Metal Raceways
386,70 Sepárate Compartments. If surface metal race- Author's Comments:

ways have sepárate compartments within a single raceway, power
• Separation from power conductors is required by the NEC ior
and lighting conductors can occupy one compartment, and the other the following low-voltage and limited-energy systems:
compartment may contain control, signaling, or Communications
- CATV,820.44{F)(1)
wiring. Stamping, imprinting, or color coding of the interior finish must
- Communications, 800.133(A)(1)
identify the sepárate compartments, and the same relativo position of
- Control and Signaling, 725.136(6)
compartments must be maintained throughout the premises. - Fire Alarms, 760.136(B)
- Intrinsically Safe Systems, 504.30(A)(2)
- Instrumentation Tray Cable, 727.5
- Radio and Televisión, 810.18(0)
- Sound Systems, 640.9(C)
• Nonconductive optical fiber cables can occupy the same cable
tray or raceway as conductors for electric light, power, Class
1, or nonpower-limited fire alarm circuits [770.133(A)].
404 Mike Holt's lllustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Eléctrica! Code, Volume 1
ARTICLE
392 Cable Trays

INTRODUCTION TO ARTICLE 392—CABLE TRAYS
A cable tray system is a unit or an assembiy of units or sections with associated fittings that forms a structural system used to secureiy
fasten or support cables and raceways. Cable tray systems include ladder, ventilated trough, ventilated channel, solid bottom, and other
similar structures. Cable trays are manufactured in many forms, from a simple hanger or wire mesh to a substantial, rigid, steel support
system. Cable trays are designed and manufactured to support specific wiring methods, as identified in 392.10(A).
PART L GENERAL PART IL INSTALLATION

392.1 Scope. Article 392 covers cable tray systems, inciuding 392.10 Uses Permitted. Cable trays can be used as a sup-
ladder, ventilated trough, ventilated channel, solid bottom, and other port system for sen/ice, feeder, or branch-circuit conductors, as well
similar structures. as Communications circuits, control circuits, and signaling circuits.
Figure 392-2
392.2 Definition.
Cable Tray System. A unit or assembiy of units or sections with asso-
ciated fittings forming a rigid structural system used to secureiy
fasten or support cables, raceways, and boxes. Figure 392-1
I I Cable Tray S y s t e m
I i 392.2 Definition
Cable trays can b e u s e d a s a support s y s t e m for:

• Service Conductors • C o m m u n i c a t i o n s Circuits
• Feeders • Control Circuits
• Branch Circuits • Signaling Circuits
Copynghl 2011, wwivM*eHoll com
A unit or assembiy of units or sections with associated Figure 392-2

fittings forming a rigid structural system used to secureiy
fasten or support cables, raceways, and boxes.
Figure 392-1 Author's Comment: Cable trays used to support service-

entrance conductors must contain only service-entrance
conductors unless a solid fixed barrier sepárales the service-
Author's Comment: Cable tray isn't a type of raceway. It's a
entrance conductors from other conductors [230.44].
support system for cables and raceways.
mke Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHoltcom • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 405

392.12 Cable Trays
Author's Comments: Author's Comment: Control, signal, and Communications

cables must be separated from the power conductors by a bar- i
• Cable tray installations aren't limited to industrial establish-
rier or maintain a 2 in. separation. I
ments.
• If exposed to the direct rays of the sun, insulated conduc- • Coaxial Cables, 820.133{A){1)(b) Ex 1 I
tors and jacketed cables must be identified as being sunlight • Class 2 and 3 Cables, 725.136(6) and 725.136(1) I
resistant. The manufacturer must identify cable trays and • Communications Cables, 800.133(A)(2) Ex 1 I
associated fittings for their intended use. • Fire Alarm Cables, 760.136(0) I
• Optical Fiber Cables, 770,133(8) I
(A) Wiring Methods. Any wiring methods listed in Table 392.10(A) • Intrinsically Safe Systems Cables, 504.30(A)(2) Ex 1 I
can be installed in a cable tray. • Radio and Televisión Cables, 810.18(B) Ex 1 I
Table 392.10(A) Wiring Methods (B) In Industrial Establishments.
Wiring Method Article/Section (1) Where conditions of maintenance and supervisión ensure that '
only qualified persons service the installed cable tray system,
Armored Cable 320
single conductor cables can be installed in accordance with the
CATV cables 820
following;
CATV raceways 820
(a) 1/0 AWG and larger listed and marked for use in cable trays.
Class 2 & 3 cables 725
Communications cables 800 (c) Equipment grounding conductors must be 4 AWG and larger
Communications raceways 800 (C) Hazardous Locations. Cable trays in hazardous locations must
Electrical metallic tubing 358 contain only the cable types and raceways permitted by the M e for
Electrical nonmetallic tubing 362 the application
Fire alarm cables 760

Author's Comment: For permitted cable types, see 501.10,
Flexible metal conduit 348
502.10.503.10, 504,20, and 505.15.
Instrumentation tray cable 727
Intermedíate metal conduit 342 (D) Nonmetallic Cable Trays. In addition to the uses permitted else-
Liquidtight flexible metal conduit 350 where in Article 392, nonmetallic cable trays can be installed in corro-
sive áreas, and in áreas requiring voltage isolation.
Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit 356
Metal-ciad cable 330

392.12 Uses Not Permitted. Cable tray systems aren't per-
Nonmetallic-Sheathed cable 334 mitted in hoistways, or where subject to severe physical damage,
Nonpower-limited fire alarm cable 760
Optical fiber cables and raceways 770 392.18 Cable Tray installations
Polyvinyl chioride PVC conduit 352 (A) Complete System. Cable trays must be installed as a complete
Power and control tray cable 336 system, except mechanically discontinuóos segments between cable
Power-limited fire alarm cable 760

tray runs, or between cable tray runs and equipment are permitted,
The system must provide for the support of the cables and raceways
725.154(C) and
in accordance with their corresponding articles.
Power-limited tray cable 725.179(E) and
725,71 (F)
A bonding jumper, sized in accordance with 250.102 and installed in
Rigid metal conduit 344 accordance with 250.96, must bond the sections of cable tray, orthe
Service-entrance cable 338 cable tray and the raceway or equipment
Signaling raceway 725
(B) Completed Before Instaliation. Each run of cable tray must be
Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable 340 completed before the instaliation of cables or conductors.
406 Mike Holfs lllustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Cable Trays 392.56
Through Partitions and Walls. Cable trays can extend through Boxes and conduit bodies attached to the bottom or side of a cable
lons and walls, or vertically through platforms and floors if the tray system must be fastened and supported in accordance with
llation is made in accordance with the firestopping requirements 314.23.
].21.
392.20 Cable and Conductor Instaliation
(E) Exposed and Accessible. Cable trays must be exposed and
accessible, except as permitted by 392.10(H). (C) Connected in Parallel. To prevent unbalanced current in the par-
allel conductors due to inductive reactance, all circuit conductors of a
(F) Adequate Access. Sufficient space must be provided and main-
parallel set [310.10(H)] must be bundied together and secured to pre-
taiíied about cable trays to permit adequate access for installing and
vent excessive movement due to fault current magnetic torces.
íPaintaining the cables.
(D) Single Conductors. Single conductors of a circuit not connected
(G) Raceways, Cables, and Boxes Supported from Cable Trays.
in parallel must be installed in a single layer, unless the conductors
h industrial facilities where conditions of maintenance and supervi-
are bound together.
sión ensure only qualified persons will service the instaliation, and if
the cable tray system is designed and installed to support the load, 392.22 Number of Conductors or Cables.
cable tray systems can support raceways, cables, boxes, and conduit
3. Figure 392-3 (A) Number of Muíticonductor Cables ín Cable Trays. The number
of muíticonductor cables, rated 2,000 volts or less, permitted in
a single cable tray must not exceed the requirements of this sec-
Cable Tray - Support Raceways a n d B o x e s tion. The conductor sizes herein apply to both aluminum and copper
392.18(G)
conductors.
I
Raceways, cables, boxes, and conduit bodies
t
can be supported to a cable tray w h e r e only
Cable Tray (1) Any Mixture of Cables. If ladder or ventilated trough cable
trays contain muíticonductor power or lighting cables, the máximum
number of cables must conform to the following:
(a) If all of the cables are 4/0 AWG and larger, the sum of the diam-
qualified persons will service t h e instaliation. eters of all cables must not exceed the cable tray width, and the
cables must be installed in a single layer.

(A) Fastened Secureiy. Cables installed vertically must be secureiy
Copyright 2011, www.MkeHott-CCHn
fastened to transverso members of the cable tray.
(B) Support. Supports for cable trays must be provided to prevent

Figure 392-3
stress on cables where they enter raceways or other enclosures from
cable tray systems. Cable trays must be supported in accordance with
For raceways terminating at the tray, a listed cable tray clamp or the manufacturer's instaliation instructions.
adapter must be used to secureiy fasten the raceway to the cable

tray system. The raceway must be supported in accordance with the
392.46 Bushed Raceway. A box isn't required where cables
appropriate raceway article. or conductors exit a bushed raceway used for the support or protec-
tion of the conductors.
Raceways or cables running parallel to the cable tray system can be
attached to the bottom or side of a cable tray system. The raceway or 392.56 Cable Spiices. Spiices are permiüed in a cable tray if
cable must be fastened and supported in accordance with the appro- the spiice is accessible and insulated by a method approved by the
priate raceway or cable's Code article. authority having jurisdiction. Spiices can project above the side ralis
of the cable tray if not subject to physical damage. Figure 392-4

392.60 Cable Trays
s p i i c e s in Cable Tray Metal cable trays containing Communications, data, and signaling
392.56 conductors and cables must be eiectrically continuous through listed
connections or the use of a bonding jumper not smaller than 10 AWG.
Cable Tray
Figure 392-6
Equipment Grounding Conductor

Metallic Cable Trays
392.60m
Spiices are permitted in a cable tray if the spiice is

accessible and insulated by a method a p p r o v e d by
the A H J . Spiices can project above the side ralis of
the cable tray w h e r e not subject to physical d a m a g e .
Copyngnt 2011. * w * MifcoHon.com
Figure 392-4
Metal cable trays containing onlv non-power conductors

392,60 Equipment Grounding Conductor. must be eiectrically continuous. through approved
connections or the use of a bonding jumper not smaller
(A) Metallic Cable Trays. Metallic cable trays can be used as equip- than 1 0 A W G .
ment grounding conductors where continuous maintenance and
supervisión ensure that qualified persons service the installed cable Figure 392-6
tray system. Figure 392-5
Author's Comment: Nonconductive coatings such as paint,

lacquer, and enamel on equipment must be removed to ensure
Metallic Cable Trays an effective ground-fault current path, or the termination fittings
392.60(A) must be designed so as to make such removal unnecessary
[250.12].
Bonding Metal cable tray can be used as an (B) Serve as Equipment Grounding Conductor. Metal cable trays
I ; Conductor equipment grounding conductor
can serve as equipment grounding conductors where the following
where continuous maintenance and
supervisión ensure that only qualified requirements have been met [392.10(0)]:
persons service the cable tray.
(1) Cable tray sections and fittings are identified for grounding.
Figure 392-7
Author's Comment: Identification will be marked on each cable

tray section.
Copyngril 2011. www.MrkeHan.com
(4) Cable tray sections, fittíngs, and connected raceways are effec-
Figure 392-5
tively bonded to each other to ensure electrical continuity and the
capacity to conduct safely any fault current likely to be imposed
The metallic cable trays that support conductors must be bonded on them [250.96(A)]. This is accomplished by using bolted
together to ensure that they have the capacity to conduct safely any mechanical connectors or bonding jumpers sized in accordance
fault current likely to be imposed in accordance with 250.96(A). with 250.102.
408 Mike HoiVs iiiustrated Guide to Understanding tiie 2011 Nationai Eiectricai Code, Voiume 1
Cable Trays 392.80
Metallic Cable Trays - Serve a s 392.80 Ampacity of Conductors.

392.60(B}(1) (A) Ampacity in Cable Trays.
(1) The allowable ampacity of muíticonductor cables installed

Bonding according to the requirements of 392.22(A) must be as given in
Conductor Steel or a l u m i n u m cable tray
systems can serve as a n E G C Table 310.15(B)(16) and Table 310.15(B)(18).
w h e n cable tray sections and
(a) The conductor ampacity adjustment factors of 310.15(B){3)(a)
fittings are identified for grounding
and are bonded t o each other. apply to a given cable if it contains more than three current-car-
rying conductors. The conductor adjustment factors only apply to
the number of current-carrying conductors in the cable and not to
the number of conductors in the cable tray.
Copynghl 20Í1. www.HikeHon.coni
Figure 392-7
Milce Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.IVIikeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 409

CHAPTER
3 Practice Questions
These questions are based on tiie 2011 National 4. Where cables and nonmetallic raceways are installed parallel
Electrical Code. Please use ttie 2011 NEC Code bool< to to framing members, the nearest outside surface of the cable
answer tlie following questions. or raceway shall be the nearest edge of the framing
member where nails or screws are likely to penétrate.
(a) not less than iy4 in. from

CHAPTER 3. WIRING METHODS (b) immediately adjacent to
AND MATERIALS (c) not less than 1/16 in. from
(d) 90°away from
Article 300. Wiring Methods
1. Conductors shall be installed within a raceway, cable, or enclo- 5. When installed under metal-corrugated sheet roof decking, the
sure. rules for spacing from roof decking apply equally to rigid metal
conduit and intermedíate metal conduit.
(a) True
(b) False (a) True
(b) False
2. Where cables or nonmetallic raceways are installed through

bored holes in joists, rafters, or wood members, holes shall be 6. What is the minimum cover requirement for direct burial Type
bored so that the edge of the hole is the nearest edge of UF cable installed outdoors that supplies a 120V, 30A circuit?
the wood member.
(a) 6 in.
(a) not less than VA in. from (b) 1 2 i n .
(b) immediately adjacent to (c) 18 in.
(c) not less than 1/16 in. from (d) 24 in.
(d) 90° away from
7. What is the minimum cover requirement for Type UF cable

3. Where Type NM cables pass through cut or drilled slots or suppiying power to a 120V, 15A GFCI-protected circuit outdoors
holes in metal members, the cable shall be protected by under a driveway oí a one-family dweiling?
which are installed in the opening prior to the instaliation of the (a) 6 in.
cable and which secureiy cover all metal edges. (b) 1 2 i n .
(a) listed bushings (c) 16 in.
(b) listed grommets (d) 24 in.

(c) plates
(d) a or b
8. The interior of underground raceways shall be considered a
location.
(a) wet
(b) dry
(c) damp
(d) corrosive
Practice Questions Article 300
Direct-buried service conductors that are not encased in 14. Where nonmetallic wiring methods are subject to exposure to
concrete and that are buried 18 in. or more below/ grade shall chemical solvents or vapors, they shall be inherently resistant
have their locahon identified by a warning ribbon placed in the to chemicals based upon their being .
trench at Ieast above the underground instaliation.
(a) listed for the chemical
(a) 6 in. (b) identified for the chemical
(b) 10in. (c) a and b
(c) 12in. (d) a or b
(d}18in.
15. Where portions of a cable raceway or sieeve are subjected

10. Conduits or raceways through which moisture may contact live
to different temperatures and condensation is known to be a
parts shall be at either or both ends. probiem, the shall be filled with an approved material
(a) sealed to prevent the circulation of warm air to a colder section of the
(b) plugged raceway or sieeve.
(c) bushed
(a) raceway
(d) a or b
(b) sieeve
(c) a or b
11. Each direct-buried single conductor cable must be located (d) none of these
in the trench to the other single conductor cables in the
same parallel set of conductors, inciuding equipment grounding
conductors. 16. Where raceways are installed in wet locations above grade, the
interior of these raceways shall be considered a loca-
(a) perpendicular
tion.
(b) bundied together
(c) in cióse proximity (a) wet
(d) spaced apart (b) dry
(c) damp
(d) corrosive
12. Raceways, cable trays, cablebus, auxiliary gutters, cable armor,
boxes, cable sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings, fittings,
supports, and support hardware shall be of materiais suitable
17. Where independent support wires of a ceiling assembiy are
for .
used to support raceways, cable assemblies, or boxes above a
(a) corrosive locations ceiling, they shall be secured at ends.
(b) wet locations (a) one

(c) the environment in which they are to be installed (b) both
(d) none of these (c) a or b
(d) none of these
13. Ferrous metal raceways, boxes, fittings, supports, and support

hardware can be installed in concrete or In direct contact with 18. Ceiling-support wires used for the support of electrical race-
the earth or other áreas subject to severe corrosive influences,
ways and cables within nonfire-rated assemblies shall be
where approved for the conditions.
distinguishable from the suspended-ceiling framing support
(a) the soil is wires.

(b) made of material (a) True
(c) the qualified installer is (b) False
(d) none of these
Mil(e Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.Mit(eHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 411

Article 310 Practice Questions
19. Metal or nonmetallic raceways, cable armors, and cable 25. Electrical installations in hollow spaces, vertical shafts, and
sheaths between cabinets, boxes, fittings or other ventilation or air-handling ducts shall be made so that the
enclosures or outlets. possible spread of fire or products of combustión is not .
(a) can be attached with electrical tape (a) substantially increased

(b) are allowed gaps for expansión (b) allowed
(c) shall be continuous (c) inherent
(d) none of these (d) possible
20. In multiwire branch circuits, the continuity of the 26. Equipment and devices shall only be permitted within ducts or
conductor shall not be dependent upon the device connections. plenum chambers specifically fabricated to transport environ-
mental air if necessary for their direct action upon, or sensing
(a) ungrounded
of, the .
(b) grounded
(c) grounding electrode (a) contained air
(d) a a n d b (b) air quality
(c) air temperature
(d) none of these
21. A box or conduit body shall not be required where cables enter
or exit from conduit or tubing that is used to provide cable
support or protection against physical damage. 27. shall be permitted to support the wiring methods and
equipment permitted to be used in other spaces used for envi-
(a) True
ronmental air (plenum).
(b) False
(a) Metal cable tray system
(b) Nonmetallic wireways
22. A bushing shall be permitted in lieu of a box or terminal where
(c) PVC conduit
the conductors emerge from a raceway and enter or terminate
(d) Surface nonmetallic raceways
at equipment such as open switchboards, unenclosed control
equipment, or similar equipment.
(a) True Article 310. Conductors for General Wiring

(b) False
1. In general, the minimum size conductor permitted for use in
parallel installations is AWG.
23. Prewired raceway assemblies shall be used only where specifi-
(a) 10
cally permitted in the A/fCfor the applicable wiring method.
(b) 4
(a) True (c) 1
(b) False (d) 1/0
24. A vertical run of 4/0 AWG copper shall be supported at intervals 2. Where conductors in parallel are run in sepárate raceways, the
not exceeding . raceways shall have the same electrical characteristics.
(a) 4 0 f t (a) True

(b) 80 ft (b) False
(c) IOOft
(d) 120ft
412 Mike Hoit's iilustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
3. There are four principal determinants of conductor operating 8. THWN insulated conductors are rated .
temperature, one of which is generated internally in the
(a) 75°C
conductor as the result ot load current flow, inciuding funda-
(b) for wet locations
mental and harmonio currents.
(c) a and b
(a) friction (d) not enough information
(b) magnetism
(c) heat
9. The minimum size conductor permitted for branch circuits
(d) none of these
under 600V is AWG.
(a) 14
4. Each current-carrying conductor of a paralleled set of conduc-
(b) 12
tors shall be counted as a current-carrying conductor for the
(c) 10
purpose of appiying the adjustment factors of 310.15(B)(3)(a).
(d) 8
(a) True
(b) False
Article 312. Cabinets, Cutout Boxes,

and IVIeter Socicet Enclosures
5. When bare conductors are installed with insulated conductors,
their ampacities shall be limited to .
1. Where raceways or cables enter above the level of uninsulated
(a) 60°C live parts of cabinets, cutout boxes, and meter socket enclo-
(b) 7 5 X sures in a wet location, a(n) shall be used.
(c) 90°C
(a) fitting listed for wet locations
(d) the lowest temperature rating for any of the insulated
(b) explosionproof seal
conductors
(c) fitting listed for damp locations
(d) insulated fitting
6. On a three-phase, 4-wire, wye circuit, where the major portion

of the load consists of nonlinear loads, the neutral conductor
2. Each cable entering a cutout box .
shall be counted when appiying 310.15(B)(3)(a) adjustment
factors. (a) shall be secured to the cutout box
(b) can be sieeved through a chase
(a) True
(c) shall have a máximum of two cables per connector
(b) False
(d) all of these
7. When determining the number of current-carrying conductors,

a grounding or bonding conductor shall not be counted when Article 314. Outlet, Device, Pulí and Junction Boxes;
appiying the provisions of 310.15(B)(3)ta) . Conduit Bodies; Fittíngs; and Handhole Enclosures
(a) True
1. According to the NEC, the volume of a 3 x 2 x 2 in. device box is
(b) False
(a) 8 cu in.
(b) 10 cu in.
(c) 12 cu in.
(d) 14 cu in.
Mil(e Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHoltcom • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 413

2. When couníing the number of conductors in a box, a conductor 7. In completed installations, each outlet box shall have a .
running through the box with an unbrolên loop or coil not less
(a) cover
than twice the minimum length required for free conductors
(b) faceplate
shall be counted as conductor(s).
(c) canopy
(a) one (d) any of these
(b) two
(c) three
(d) four 8. Listed outlet boxes to support ceiling-suspended fans ttiat
weigh more than Ib shall have the máximum allowable
weight marked on the box.
3. For the purposes of determining box fill, each device or utiliza-
(a) 35 Ib
tion equipment in the box which is wider than a single device
(b) 50 Ib
box counts as two conductors for each required for the
(c) 60 Ib
mounting.
(d) 70 Ib
(a) inch
(b) kilometer
(c) gang 9. Power distribution biocks shall be permitted in pulí and junction
(d) box ""^ boxes over 100 cubic inches when they comply with the provi-
sions of 314.28(E).
(a) True
4. Conduit bodies that are durably and legibly marked by the
(b) False
manufacturer with their volume can contain spiices, taps, or
devices.
(a) True 10. shall be installed so that the wiring contained can be
(b) False rendered accessible without removing any part of the building
or, in underground circuits, without excavating sidewaiks,
paving, or earth.
5. Noncombustible surfaces that are broken or incompleto around
(a) Boxes
boxes employing a flush-type cover or faceplate shall be
(b) Conduit bodies
repaired so there will be no gaps or open spaces larger than
(c) Handhole enclosures
at the edge of the box.
(d) all of these
{a)1/16in.
(b) 1/8 in.
(c) 1/4 in. 11. Conductors, spiices or terminations in a handhole enclosure
(d) 1/2 in. shall be listed as .
(a) suitable for wet locations

(b) suitable for damp locations
6. A wood brace used for supporting a box for structural mounting
(c) suitable for direct burial in the earth
shall have a cross-section not less than nominal .
(d) none of these
(a) 1 in. X 2 in.
(b) 2 i n . x 2 i n .
(c) 2 i n . x 3 i n .
(d) 2 in. X 4 in.
icie 320. Armored Cable (Type AC) Article 330. IVIetal-Clad Cable (Type MC)
Type cable is a fabricated assembiy of insulated 1. Type is a factory assembiy of insulated circuit conduc-
conductors in a flexible interlocked metallic armor. tors within an armor of interlocking metal tape, or a smooth or
corrugated metallic sheath.
(a) AC
(b) MC (a) AC
(c) NM (b) MC
(d) b and c (c) NM
(d) b and c
Armored cable shall not be installed .

2. Smooth-Sheath Type MC cable with an external diameter not
(a) in damp or wet locations
greater than in. shall have a bending radius not more than
(b) where subject to physical damage
times the cable external diameter.
(c) where exposed to corrosive conditions
(d) all of these (a) five
tb)10
(c) 12
3. When Type AC cable is run across the top of a floor joist in an (cl)13
attic without permanent ladders or stairs, substantial guard
strips within of the scuttie hole, or attic entrance, shall
protect the cable. 3. Type MC cable shall be secured at intervals not exceeding
(a) 3ft
(b) 4ft (a) 3ft
{c)5ft (b) 4ft
(d)6tt (c) 6ft
(d) 8ft
4. Type AC cable can be supported and secured by .

4. Fittings used for connecting Type MC cable to boxes, cabinets,
(a) Staples
or other equipment shall .
(b) cable ties
(c) straps (a) be nonmetallic only
(d) all of these (b) be listed and identified for such use
(c) be listed and identified as weatherproof
(d) include anti-shorting bushings
5. Armored cable used to connect recessed luminaires or equip-
ment within an accessible ceiling can be unsecured for lengths
up to .
(a) 2 f t
(b) 3ft
(c) 4V2ft
(d) 6ft

Article 334. Nonmetallic-Slieathed 6. For Type NM and NMC cable, the conductor ampacity used for
Cable (Types NM and NMC) ambient temperature correction [310.15(BK2){a}], conductor

bundiing adjustment [310.15(B)(3)(a)], or both, is based on
1. Type cable is a wiring method that endoses two or the 90^0 conductor insulation rating [310.15(B)(2)], provided
more insulated conductors within a nonmetallic jacket. the adjusted or corrected ampacity doesn't exceed that for a
rated conductor.
(a) AC
(b) MC (a) 60°C
(c) NM (b) 75°C
(d) b and c (c) 9 0 X
(d) 120°C
2. Type NM and Type NMC cables shall be permitted in .
(a) in one- and two-family dweilings and their attached/ Article 338. Service-Entrance Cable (Types SE and USE)
detached garages or storage buildings
(b) multifamily dweilings permitted to be of Types III, IV, and V 1. Type SE cable shall be permitted to be used as in wiring
construction systems where all of the circuit conductors of the cable are of
(c) other structures permitted to be of Types III, IV, and V the thermoset or thermoplastic type.
construction, except as prohibited in 334.12.
(a) branch circuits
(d) any of these
(b) feeders
(c) a or b
(d) neither a or b
3. Type NM cable shall closely follow the surface ot the building
finish or running boards when run exposed.
(a) True 2. Type USE cable is not permitted for wiring.

(b) False
(a) underground
(b) interior
(c) a or b
4. Where Type NM cable is run at angles with joists in unfinished
(d) a and b
basements and crawl spaces, it is permissible to secure cables
not smaller than conductors directly to the lower edges
of the joist.
Article 340. Underground Feeder and
(a) two, 6 AWG
Branch-Circuit Cable (Type UF)
(b) three, 8 AWG
(c) three, 10 AWG
1. Type cable is a factory assembiy of conductors with
(d) a or b
an overall covering of nonmetallic material suitable for direct
- burial in the earth.
5. Type NM cable protected from physical damage by a raceway (a) NM

shall not be required to be within the raceway (b) UF
(c) SE
(a) covered
(d) TC
(b) insulated
(c) secured
(d) unspiiced
2. Type UF cable can be used in commercial garages. 4. Threadless couplings approved for use with IMC in wet loca-
tions shall be .
(a) True
(b) False (a) rainproof
(b) listed for wet locations
(c) moistureproof
3. Type UF cable shall not be used where subject to physical
(d) concrete-tight
damage.
(a) True
(b) False Article 344. Rigid Metal Conduit (Type RMC)
1. Galvanized steel, stainless steel and red brass RMC can be

4. The overall covering of Type UF cable is . installed in concrete, in direct contact with the earth, or in
(a) fíame retardant áreas subject to severe corrosive influences when protected by
(b) moisture, fungus, and corrosión resistant and judged suitable for the condition.
(c) suitable for direct burial in the earth (a) ceramic

(d) all of these (b) corrosión protection
(c) backfill
(d) a natural barrier
Article 342. Intermediate IVIetal Conduit (Type IMC)
1. IMC can be installed in or under cinder fill subject to permanent 2. Aluminum fittings and enclosures can be used with
moisture . conduit where not subject to severe corrosive influences.
(a) where the conduit is not less than 18 in. under the fill (a) steel rigid metal
(b) when protected on all sides by 2 in. of noncinder concrete (b) aluminum rigid metal
(c) where protected by corrosión protection judged suitable for (c) PVC-coated rigid conduit only
the condition (d) a and b
(d) any of these
3. Cut ends of RMC shall be or otherwise finished to

2. A run of IMC shall not contain more than the equivalent of remove rough edges.
quarter bends between pulí points such as conduit (a) threaded

bodies and boxes.
(b) reamad
(a) one (c) painted
(b) two (d) galvanized
(c) three
(d) four
4. Threadless couplings and connectors used with RMC buried in
masonry or concrete shall be the type.
3. Trade size 1 IMC shall be supported at intervals not exceeding (a) raintight
(b) wet and damp location
(a) 8 f t (c) nonabsorbent
(b) 10ft (d) concrete-tight
(c) 12 ft
(d) 14ft

5. Each length of RMC shall be clearly and durably identified in Article 350. Liquidtight Flexible
every . Metal Conduit (Type LFMC)
(a) 3 f t
1. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit must be secureiy fastened by
(b) 5 f t
a means approved by the authority having jurisdiction within
(c) 10 ft
of termination.
(d) 20 ft
(a) 6 in.
(b) 1 0 i n .
Article 348. Flexible Metal Conduit (Type FMC) (c) 1 ft

(d) 1 0 f t
1. FMC can be installed exposed or concealed where not subject
to physical damage.
2. For liquidtight flexible metal conduit, if flexibility is necessary
(a) True after instaliation, unsecured lengths from the last point the
(b) False raceway is secureiy fastened must not exceed .
(a) 3 ft for trade sizes Vi through 1

2. Cut ends of FMC shall be trimmed or otherwise finished to (b) 4 ft for trade sizes 1 Vz through 2
remove rough edges, except where fittings . (c) 5 ft for trade sizes 2 Vi and larger
(d) allof these
(a) are the crimp-on type
(b) thread into the convolutions
(c) contain insulated throats 3. Where flexibility , liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall
(d) are listed for grounding be permitted to be used as an equipment grounding conductor
when installed in accordance with 250.118(6).
3. Flexible metal conduit shall not be required to be where (a) is required after instaliation
fished between access points through concealed spaces in (b) is not required after instaliation
finished buildings or structures and supporting is impracti- (c) either a or d
cable. (d) is optional
(a) secured
(b) supported
(c) complete Article 352. Rigid Polyvinyl Chioride Conduit (Type PVC)
(d) (a) and (b)
1. PVC conduit shall be permitted for exposed work where subject
to physical damage if identified for such use.
4. In an FMC instaliation, connectors shall not be
(a) True
concealed.
(b) False
(a) straight
(b) angle
(c) grounding-type
(d) none of these
418 mke Holt's lllustrated Guide to Understanding the 2011 National Electrical Code, Volume 1
Questions Article 362
PVC conduit shall not be used , unless specifically 2. Bends in LFNC shall between pulí points.
permitted.
(a) not be made
(a) in hazardous (classified) locations (b) not be limited in degrees
(b) for the support of luminaires or other equipment (c) be limited to 360 degrees
(c) where subject to physical damage unless identified for such (d) be limited to 180 degrees
use
(d) allof these
Article 358. Electrical Metallic Tubing (Type EMT)
Bends in PVC conduit shall between pulí points.

1. is a listed thin-wail, metallic tubing of circular cross
(a) not be made section used for the instaliation and physical protection of elec-
(b) not be limited in degrees trical conductors when joined together with listed fittings.
(c) be limited to 360 degrees
(a) LFNC
(d) be limited to 180 degrees
(b) EMT
(c) NUCC
(d) RTRC
4, Where PVC conduit enters a box, fitting, or other enclosure, a
bushing or adapter shall be provided to protect the conductor
from abrasión unless the design of the box, fitting, or enclosure
2. When EMT is installed in wet locations, all supports, bolts,
affords equivalent protection.
straps, and screws shall be .
(a) True
(a) of corrosion-resistant materiais
(b) False
(b) protected against corrosión
(c) a or b
(d) of nonmetallic materiais only
5. PVC conduit and fittings for use above ground shall have the
following characteristics .
(a) fíame retardant 3. EMT shall not be threaded.

(b) resistance to low temperatures and sunlight
(a) True
(c) resistance to distortion from heat
(b) False
(d) allof these
Article 362. Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (Type ENT)

Article 356. Liquidtight Flexible
Nonmetallic Conduit (Type LFNC) 1. ENT is composed of a material resistant to moisture and chem-
ical atmospheres, and is .
1. LFNC shall be permitted for .
(a) flexible
(a) direct burial where listed and marked for the purpose (b) fíame retardant
(b) exposed work (c) fireprooí
(c) outdoors where listed and marked for this purpose (d) flammable
(d) all of these

.iS-MfíU-í. •
•
2. When a building is supplied with a fire sprinkier system, ENT Article 376. I\1etal Wireways
can be installed above any suspended ceiling.
1. Metal wireways are sheet metal troughs with for
(a) True
housing and protecting electric conductors and cable.
(b) False
(a) removable covers
(b) hinged covers
3. ENT is not permitted in hazardous (classihed) locations, unless (c) a or b
permitted in other articles of the Code. (d) none of these
(a) True
(b) False
2. Wireways can pass transversely through a wall .
(a) if the length passing through the wall is unbroken

4. ENT shall not be used where exposed to the direct rays of the (b) if the wall is of fire-rated construction
sun, unless identified as . (c) in hazardous {classified) locations
(a) high-temperature rated (d) if the wall is not of fire-rated construction
(b) sunlight resistant

(c) Schedule 80
3. The sum of the cross-sectional áreas of all contained conduc-
(d) never can be
tors at any cross-section of a metal wireway shall not exceed
5. Cut ends of ENT shall be trimmed inside and to remove (a) 50 percent
rough edges. (b) 20 percent
(a) outside (c) 25 percent
(b) tapered (d) 80 percent
(c) filed
(d) beveled
4. Where insulated conductors are deflected within a metal
wireway, the wireway shall be sized to meet the bending
6. Bushings or adapters shall be provided at ENT terminations to requirements corresponding to wire per terminal in
protect the conductors from abrasión, unless the box, fitting, or Table 312.6(A).
enclosure design provides equivalent protection. (a) one
(a) True (b) hwo
(b) False (c) three

(d) four
7. The of conductors used in prewired ENT manufactured

assemblies shall be identified by means of a printed tag or 5. Power distribution biocks installed in metal wireways shall
label attached to each end of the manufactured assembiy.
(a) type (a) allow for sufficient wire-bending space at termináis
(b) size (b) not have uninsulated exposed live parts
(c) quantity (c) a or b
(d) all of these (d) a and b
Article 380. IVIultioutlet Assembiy 5. Surface metal raceway enclosures providing a transition from
other wiring methods shall have a means for connecting a(n)
1. A multioutlet assembiy shall not be installed.
(a) in hoistways (a) grounded conductor

(b) where subject to severe physical damage (b) ungrounded conductor
(c) where subject to corrosive vapors (c) equipment grounding conductor
(d) all of these (d) allof these
Article 386. Surface Metal Raceways Article 392. Cable Trays
1. Unbroken lengths of surface metal raceways can be run 1. A cable tray is a unit or assembiy of units or sections and asso-
through dry . ciated fittings forming a system used to secureiy fasten
or support cables and raceways.
(a) walls
(b) partitions (a) structural
(c) floors (b) flexible
(d) all of these (c) movable
(d) secure
2. The voltage between conductors in a surface metal raceway

shall not exceed unless the metal has a thickness of not 2. Where exposed to the direct rays of the sun, insulated conduc-
less than 0.040 in. nominal. tors and jacketed cables installed in cable trays shall be
as being sunlight resistant.
(a) 150V
(b) 300V (a) listed
(c) 600V (b) approved
(d) 1,000V (c) identified
(d) none of these
3. The máximum number of conductors permitted in any surface

raceway shall be . 3. Any of the following wiring methods can be installed in a cable
tray:
(a) no more than 30 percent of the inside diameter
(b) no greater than the number for which it was designed (a) metal raceways
(c) no more than 75 percent of the cross-sectional área (b) nonmetallic raceways
(d) that which is permitted in Table 312.6(A) (c) cables
(d) allof these
4. Surface metal raceways shall be secured and supported at

intervals . 4. Each run of cable tray shall be before the instaliation of
cables.
(a) in accordance with the manufacturer's instaliation instruc-
tions (a) tested for 25 ohms resistance
(b) appropriate for the building design (b) insulated
(c) not exceeding 4 ft (c) completed
(d) not exceeding 8 ft (d) all of these

5. In industrial facilities where conditions of maintenance and 8. Metal cable trays containing only non-power conductors such
supervisión ensure that only qualified persons will service the as communication, data, signal, conductors and cables must be
instaliation, cable tray systems can be used to support . eiectrically continuous, through listed connections or the use of
an insulated stranded bonding jumper not smaller than .
(a) raceways
(b) cables (a) 12 AWG
{c} boxes and conduit bodies (b) 10 AWG
(d) allof these (c) 6AWG
(d) 4AWG
6. Where single conductor cables comprising each phase, neutral,

or grounded conductor of a circuit are connected in parallel in a 9. Steel or aluminum cable tray systems shall be permitted to be
cable tray, the conductors shall be installed , to prevent used as an equipment grounding conductor, provided the cable
current unbalance in the paralleled conductors due to inductive tray sections and fittings are identified as , among other
reactance. requirements.
(a) in groups consisting of not more than three conductors per (a) an equipment grounding conductor
phase or neutral (b) special
(b) in groups consishng of not more than one conductor per (c) industrial
phase or neutral (d) all of these
(c) as individual conductors secureiy bound to the cable tray
(d) in sepárate groups
10. Cable trays shall .
(a) include fittings or other suitable means for changes in direc-

7. A box shall not be required where cables or conductors from
tion and elevation
cable trays are installed in bushed conduit and tubing used as
(b) have side ralis or equivalent structural members
support or for protection against .
(c) be made of corrosion-resistant material or protected from
(a) abuse corrosión as required by 300.6
(b) unauthorized access (d) allof these
(c) physical damage
(d) tampering

Introduction To Chapter 3-Wiring Methods and Materials

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Introduction To Chapter 3-Wiring Methods and Materials

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

CHAPTER

INTRODUCTION TO CHAPTER 3—WIRING METHODS AND MATERIALS

Wiring Method ArUctes

Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 273

Cable Articles • Article 33&—Service-Entrance Cable (Types SE and

• Article 336—Powíer and Control Tray Cable (Type TC).

• Article 358—Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).

Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHoltcom • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 275

PART L GENERAL ^^^^^^^W integral Parts of Equipment

(A) Wiring Installations. Article 300 contains the general require-

Author's Comment: The requirements contained in Article 300

Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHoltcom • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 277

300.3 Conductors. Conductors G r o u p e d Together

Ex: Overhead conductors can be installed in accordance with 225.6.

(B) Circuit Conductors Grouped Togetlier. All conductors of a circuit í

Circuit Conductors G r o u p e d Together

VIOLATION Induced Currents ín Ferrous Metal Parts

(1) Paralleled Installations. Conductors installed in parallel in accor-

Equipment Bonding J u m p e r Mixing P o w e r a n d Control Conductors

Figure 300-5 Figure 300-7

• Class circuit conductors can be installed with associated

Mixing Class 1 Conductors With

Conductors of different systems can occupy the s a m e

separated from power and lighting circuits so the higher-

signal, or Communications wiring: Figure 300-7

- CATV Coaxial Cable, 820,133(A)

Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633) 279

• Armored Cable, Article 320

Figure 300-9 Protection Against Physical D a m a g e

Bored Hole, [300.4(A)(1

Notch (if Permitted)~j

Armored Cable Metal-Ciad Cable

ductors, raceways, and cables must be protected against physical nails.

Raceways and Cables T h r o u g h W o o d M e m b e r s

A listed a n d marked steel

A listed a n d marked steel

Author's Comment: Hardened steel piafes thinner than Vie in.

iys. CAUTION: ^hen drilling or notching wood members,

medíate metal conduit, PVC conduit, or electrical metallic tubing.

IVlike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHoltcom • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633)

Protection Against Physical D a m a g e

Author's Comment: This rule doesn't apply to control, signal-

Figure 300-15 • CATV Coaxial Cable, 820.24

or furring strips must be protected if they're likely to be penetrated by permitted.

Note: Roof decking material will be installed or replaced after the

Ex 1: Protection isn't required if tfie cable is installed in rigid metal

(H) Structural Joints. A listed expansion/deflection fitting or other

6 AWG 300.5 Underground Installations.

Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHoltcom • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633)

Underground Installations - M i n i m u m Cover Depths U n d e r g r o u n d Installations

All Other |6in. 18 in. X 12 in.

Figure 300-19 Figure 300-20

(B) Wet Locations. The interior of enclosures or raceways installed

Author's Comment: The definition of a "Wet Location" as con- Underground Installations

Type r^C Cable Under Buildings

\ or Schedule 80 PVC conduit.

Type ÍVIC cable listed for direct burial or concrete

(1) Emerging from Grade. Direct-buried cables or conductors that

must be protected to the point of entrance.

Mike Holt Enterprises, Inc. • www.MikeHolt.com • 888.NEC.C0DE (632.2633)

Author's Comment: Large rocks, chunks of concrete, steel

(G) Raceway Seals. If moisture could enter a raceway and contact

Ex 2: Parallel circuit conductors installed in accordance with